Allied Telesis Switch AT 9724TS User Manual
High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
AT-9724TS  
Installation and User’s Guide  
PN D617/10032 Rev 1  
Copyright. 2004 AlliedTelesyn, Inc.  
19800 North Creek Parkway, Suite 200, BothellWA 98011, USA  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced without prior written permission from AlliedTelesyn,  
Inc.All product names, company names, logos or other designations mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks  
of their respective owners.AlliedTelesyn, Inc. reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information  
contained in this document without prior written notice.The information provided herein is subject to change  
without notice. In no event shall AlliedTelesyn Inc. be liable for any incidental, special, indirect, or consequential damages  
whatsoever, including but not limited to lost profits, arising out of or related to this manual or the information contained  
herein, even if AlliedTelesyn, Inc. has been advised of, known, or should have known, the possibility of such damages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Electrical Safety and Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Purpose ofThis Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
HowThis Guide is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Document Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Where to Find Related Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Contacting AlliedTelesynTechnical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Returning Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
For Sales or Corporate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Tell UsWhatYouThink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Fast Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Gigabit EthernetTechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
SwitchingTechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Switch Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Installing the SFP ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Front-Panel Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Side Panel Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
BeforeYou Connect to the Network.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Installing the SwitchWithout the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Installing the Switch in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Mounting the Switch in a Standard 19" Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
External Redundant Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
ConnectingThe Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
SwitchTo End Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Switch to Hub or Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
ConnectingTo Network Backbone or Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Stacking and the AT-9724TS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Stacking Limitations utilizing a RingTopology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
IntroductionTo Switch Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
AT-9724TS Gigabit Layer 3 Switch Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Web-based Management Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
SNMP-Based Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Command Line Console InterfaceThroughThe Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting the Console Port (RS-232 DCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
FirstTime Connecting toThe Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
SNMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
IP Address Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting Devices to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Introduction toWeb-based Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Login toWeb Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Web-based User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Areas of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
ConfiguringThe Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Switch Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Setting the Switch's IP Address using the Console Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Box Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Port Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Port Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Link Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Understanding PortTrunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
LACP Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
MAC Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
MAC Notification Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
MAC Notification Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
IGMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
IGMP Snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Static Router Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
SpanningTree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
802.1s MSTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
802.1w Rapid SpanningTree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
STP Bridge Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
MST ConfigurationTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MSTI Port Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
STP Instance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
STP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Forwarding & Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Unicast Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Static Multicast Forwarding.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Understanding IEEE 802.1p Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
VLAN Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Notes AboutVLANs on the AT-9724TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
IEEE 802.1QVLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
802.1QVLANTags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
PortVLAN ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Tagging and Untagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Ingress Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
DefaultVLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Port-basedVLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
VLAN Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
VLAN andTrunk Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
ProtocolVLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
StaticVLAN Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
GVRP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Traffic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Port Lock Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
The Advantages of QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Understanding QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Bandwidth Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
QoS Scheduling Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Output Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Configuring the Combination Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
802.1p Default Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
802.1p User Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Traffic Segmentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
System Log Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
SNTP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
CurrentTime Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Time Zone and DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Access ProfileTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Configuring the Access ProfileTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Port Access Entity (802.1X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Understanding 802.1x Port-based and MAC-based Network Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Port-Based Network Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
MAC-Based Network Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Configure Authenticator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Local Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
PAE System Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Port Capability Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Initializing Ports for Port Based 802.1x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Initializing Ports for MAC Based 802.1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Reauthenticate Port(s) for Port Based 802.1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Reauthenticate Port(s) for MAC Based 802.1x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
RADIUS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Layer 3 IP Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Layer 3 Global Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Setting Up IP Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
MD5 KeyTable Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Route Redistribution Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Static/Default Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Route Preference Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Static ARPTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
RIP 1 Route Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
RIP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Setting Up RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
OSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
General OSPF Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
OSPF Area ID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
OSPF Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
OSPFVirtual Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
OSPF Area Aggregation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
OSPF Host Route Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
DHCP / BOOTP Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
DHCP / BOOTP Relay Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
DHCP/BootP Relay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
DNS Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Configuring DNS Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
DNS Relay Static Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
VRRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
VRRP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
VRRP Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
IP Multicast Routing Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
IGMP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
DVMRP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
DVMRP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
DVMRP Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
PIM-DM Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
PIM-DM Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Security IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Admin and User Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Access Authentication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Policy & Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Application's Authentication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Authentication Server Group Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Authentication Server Hosts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Login Method Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Enable Method Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Local Enable Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Enable Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Download Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Secure Shell (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
SSH Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
SSH Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
SSH User Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
SNMP Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
SNMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
SNMP UserTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
SNMPViewTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
SNMP GroupTable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
SNMP CommunityTable Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
SNMP HostTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
SNMP Engine ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Port Utilization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
CPU Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Received (RX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
UMB Cast (RX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Transmitted (TX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Received (RX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Transmitted (TX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Stacking Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Switch History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
IGMP Snooping Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
IGMP Snooping Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Browse Router Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Port Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Authenticator State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Authenticator Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Authenticator Session Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Authenticator Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
RADIUS Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
RADIUS Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Layer 3 Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Browse IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Browse RoutingTable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Browse ARPTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Browse IP Multicast ForwardingTable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Browse IGMP GroupTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
OSPF Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Browse OSPF LSDBTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Browse OSPF NeighborTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
OSPFVirtual Neighbor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
DVMRP Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Browse DVMRP RoutingTable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Browse DVMRP Neighbor AddressTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Browse DVMRP Routing Next HopTable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
PIM Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
PIM Neighbor AddressTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Switch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
TFTP Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Download Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Download Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Upload Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Upload Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Multiple Image Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Firmware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Config Firmware Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
PingTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Save Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Reboot Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Appendix ATechnical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Appendix BTranslated Electrical Safety and Emission Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Purpose of This Guide  
This guide is intended for network administrators who are responsible for installing and maintaining the AT-9724TS Gigabit Switch.  
How This Guide is Organized  
This guide contains the following chapters and appendices:  
Chapter 1,  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 4.  
Chapter 5.  
Chapter 6.  
Chapter 7.  
Chapter 8.  
Chapter 9.  
Chapter 10.  
Appendix A,  
Appendix B,  
Introduction, describes the features, functions, LEDs, and ports on the Gigabit Switch.  
Installation, describes how to install the switch.  
Connecting the Switch.  
Introduction to Switch Management, basic management features, connecting devices to the switch.  
Introduction toWeb-based Switch Management.  
Configuring the Switch, including accessing switch information, setting up network configurations.  
Management, security features, user accounts, access authentication control.  
SNMP Manager, description of features and brief introduction.  
Monitoring  
Maintenance, switch utility functions.  
Specifications, provides Residential Gateway specifications.  
Translated Electrical Safety and Emission Information, contains multi-language translations of the cautions and warnings in this manual.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Document Conventions  
This guide uses several conventions that you should become familiar with before you begin to install the product:  
Note  
A note provides additional information.  
Ꮨ
ƽ
Warning  
A warning indicates that performing or omitting a specific action may result in bodily injury.  
Caution  
A caution indicates that performing or omitting a specific action may result in equipment damage or loss of data.  
[ ]  
In a command line, square brackets indicate an optional entry. For example: [copy filename] means that optionally you can type copy  
followed by the name of the file. Do not type the brackets.  
Bold font  
Indicates a button, a toolbar icon, menu, or menu item. For example: Open the File menu and choose Cancel. Used for emphasis. May  
also indicate system messages or prompts appearing on your screen. For example:You have mail. Bold font is also used to represent  
filenames, program names and commands. For example: use the copy command.  
Typewriter  
Font  
Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in the manual.  
Italics  
Indicates a window name or a field.Also can indicate a variables or parameter that is replaced with an appropriate word or string.  
For example: type filename means that you should type the actual filename instead of the word shown in italic.  
Menu Name >  
Menu Option  
Indicates the menu structure. Device > Port > Port Properties means the Port Properties menu option under the  
Port menu option that is located under the Device menu.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Where to Find Related Guides  
The AlliedTelesyn web site at www.alliedtelesyn.com under the support section contains the most recent documentation for all of our products.All web-  
based documents relating to this product and other AlliedTelesyn products can be downloaded from the web site.  
Contacting Allied Telesyn Technical Support  
You can contact AlliedTelesyn technical support through the company’s web site www.alliedtelesyn.com under the support section or by telephone or fax.  
EUROPEAN SUPPORT NUMBERS  
Telephone support is available Monday through Friday between 0900 and 1730 local time (excluding national holidays).  
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, The Netherlands, Norway, Sweden, Switzerland  
and the United Kingdom  
Free phone 00 800 287 877 678 or +31 20 711 4333  
[email protected]  
Spain:  
Free phone 00 800 287 877 67 or +31 20 711 4333  
[email protected]  
Finland:  
Free phone: 990 800 287 877 67 or +31 20 711 4333  
[email protected]  
Croatia and Slovenia:  
SupportTelephone number: +385 1 382 1341  
Support Fax Number: + 385 1 382 1340  
Support e-mail Address:AT[email protected]  
Czech Republic:  
SupportTelephone number: +420 296 538 888  
Support Fax Number: +420 296 538 889  
Support e-mail Address: [email protected]  
Hungary:  
SupportTelephone number: +36 1 382 6385  
Support Fax number: +36 1 382 6398  
Support e-mail Address: [email protected]  
Poland:  
SupportTelephone number: +48 22 535 9670  
Support Fax number: +48 22 535 9671  
Support e-mail Address: [email protected]  
Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia, Bosnia and Herzegovina and Bulgaria:  
SupportTelephone number: +381 11 32 35 639  
Support Fax Number: +381 11 3235 992  
Support e-mail Address:Yu[email protected]  
Russia and former Soviet Union Countries:  
SupportTelephone number: +7-095-935 8585  
Support Fax Number: +7-095-935 8586  
Support e-mail Address : [email protected]  
Ukraine:  
SupportTelephone number: +7-095-935 8585  
Support Fax Number: +7-095-935 8586  
Support e-mail Address : Ukraine [email protected]  
All other countries not listed above should refer their technical support request to:  
SupportTelephone number: +31 20 711 4333  
Support e-mail Address: [email protected]  
Americas:  
Technical Support by Phone or Fax (8-5 PST M-F)  
Toll-free: 1 800 428 4835  
Fax: 1 425 481 3790  
*Support for Puerto Rico and the USVirgin Islands is provided through ourTechnical Support Center in Latin America.  
México  
e-mail [email protected]  
Teléfono +52 55 5559 0611  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Returning Products  
Products for return or repair must first be assigned a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number. RMA policy varies from country to country. Please check  
the applicable RMA policy at www.alliedtelesyn.com. For Europe, you can also contact our European Customer Service centre by e-mail at  
[email protected].  
FTP Server  
If you need management software for an AlliedTelesyn managed device, you can download the software by connecting directly to our FTP server at  
ftp.alliedtelesyn.com.At login, enter “anonymous” as the user name and your e-mail address as the password.  
European & Latin America Headquarters  
Allied Telesis International SA  
Via Motta 24  
Italy – North  
Sweden  
AlliedTelesyn International S.r.l.  
Via Anna Kuliscioff, 37  
20152 Milano  
AlliedTelesyn International  
Isafjordsgatan 22, B5tr  
164 40 Kista  
6830 Chiasso  
Switzerland  
Tel: +41 91 6976900  
Fax: +41 91 6976911  
Tel: +39 02 41304.1  
Fax: +39 02 41304.200  
Sweden  
Tel.: +46 (0) 8131414  
Fax: +46 (0) 87506004  
Italy – East  
Tel: +39 348 1522583  
Tel & Fax: +39 049 8868175  
Allied Telesis International Services  
PiazzaTirana n.24/4 B  
20147 Milano  
United Kingdom  
AlliedTelesyn International Ltd.  
100 Longwater Avenue  
GreenPark  
Italy  
Italy – South  
Tel: +39 02 4141121  
Fax: +39 02 41411261  
AlliedTelesyn International S.r.l.  
ViaTroilo il Grande 3  
00131 Roma  
Reading, RG2 6GP  
Tel: +44 118 920 9800  
Fax: +44 118 975 2456  
REGIONAL LOCATIONS  
Tel: +39 06 41294507  
Fax: +39 06 41404801  
Latin America – Support Office  
AlliedTelesyn International  
19800 North Creek Parkway, Suite 200  
Bothell,WA 98011 USA  
Tel: +1 425 481 3852  
Fax: +1 425 489 9191  
Austria & Eastern Europe  
AlliedTelesynVertriebsgesellschaft m.b.H.  
Lainzer Strasse 16/5-6  
1130,Vienna  
Tel: +43-1-876 24 41  
Turkey  
AlliedTelesyn International  
6. Cadde 61/2 Öveçler  
06460 Ankara  
Tel: +90 312 472 1054/55  
Fax: +90 312 472 1056  
Toll Free (Mexico & Puerto Rico): (95-800) 424 5012 ext.  
3852  
Fax: +43-1-876 25 72  
Poland  
Germany – South  
AlliedTelesyn International GmbH  
Zeppelinstr. 1  
85399 Hallbergmoos  
Tel: +49-811-999 37-0  
Fax: +49-811-999 37-22  
Latin America – Mexico  
AlliedTelesyn International  
AV. Insurgentes Sur # 800, Piso 8  
Col. DelValle  
México, DF, 03100  
Tel: +52 55 5448 4989  
Fax: +52 55 5448 4910  
AlliedTelesynVertriebsgesellschaft m.b.H.  
Sp. z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce  
ul. Elektoralna 13  
00-137Warszawa  
Tel: +48 22 620 82 96  
Fax: +48 22 654 48 56  
Germany - Koln  
AlliedTelesyn GmbHWest  
Edmund Rumpler-Str. 6b  
51149 Koln  
Deutschand  
Tel.: +49 02203 1019685  
Fax: +49 02203 1019678  
Portugal  
Romania  
AlliedTelesyn International  
Centro de Escritórios das Laranjeiras  
Praça Nuno Rodrigues dos Santos, Nº 7 Sala 211  
1600-171 Lisbon  
AlliedTelesynVertriebsgesellschaft m.b.H.  
str.Thomas Masaryk 23  
Sector 2, Bucharest 0209  
Tel: +40-21-211-1817/8245  
Fax: +40-21-210-5610  
Tel: +351 21 721 74 00  
Fax: +351 21 727 91 26  
Denmark  
Russia  
AlliedTelesyn International  
Ul. KorovijVall  
Dom 7 Str. 1 Office 190  
119049 Moscow  
Tel: +7095 9358585  
Fax: +7095 9358586  
AlliedTelesyn Internationa  
Jyllinge ErhvervsCenter  
Møllehaven 8  
DK-4040 Jyllinge  
Tel: +45 46734835  
Fax: +45 46734837  
Spain  
AlliedTelesyn International S.L.U  
Plaza de España  
18-4ª Ofic. 3, 28008 Madrid  
Tel: +34 91 559 1055  
Fax: +34 91 559 2644  
Finland  
Allied Telesyn International, Corp.  
19800 North Creek Parkway, Suite 200  
Bothell,WA 98011  
Tel: 1 (425) 487-8880  
Fax: 1 (425) 489-9191  
Serbia & Montenegro  
AlliedTelesynVertriebsgesellschaft m.b.H.  
Krunska 6  
11000 Belgrade  
Tel & Fax: +381 11 3033 208  
+381 11 3033 209  
AlliedTelesyn International Ltd.  
Metsänneidonkuja 10  
02130 ESPOO  
Tel: +358 9 7255 5290  
Fax: +358 9 7255 5299  
For current information, please visit our web site  
+381 11 3235 639  
Iceland +47 22 70 04 70  
www.alliedtelesyn.com  
Ireland (Freephone) 1 800 409 127  
France  
AlliedTelesyn International SAS  
12, avenue de Scandinavie  
ParcVictoria, Immeuble “LeToronto”  
91953 Courtaboeuf Cédex - Les Ulis  
Tel: +33 1 60 92 15 25  
The Netherlands  
AlliedTelesyn International BV  
Hoeksteen 26  
2132 MS Hoofddorp  
Tel: +31 20 6540 246  
Fax: +31 20 6540 249  
Fax: +33 1 69 28 37 49  
Greece  
Norway  
AlliedTelesyn International S.r.l  
Kiriazi 14-16  
145 62 Kifisia  
AlliedTelesyn International  
Ole Deviksvei 4  
0666 Oslo  
Tel: +30 210 6234 200  
Fax: +30 210 6234 209  
Tel: +47 22 70 04 70  
Fax: +47 22 70 04 01  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Tell Us What You Think  
If you have any comments or suggestions on how we might improve this or other AlliedTelesyn documents, please contact us at www.alliedtelesyn.com.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 - Introduction  
1-1 EthernetTechnology  
1-2 Switch Description  
1-3 Features  
1-4 Ports  
1-5 Front Panel Components  
1-6 Rear-Panel Description  
1-7 Side-Panel Description  
1-8 Gigabit Combo Ports  
1-9 EthernetTechnology  
1-10 Fast EthernetTechnology  
1-1 Ethernet Technology  
Fast Ethernet  
The growing importance of LANs and the increasing complexity of desktop computing applications are fueling the need for high performance networks.  
A number of high-speed LAN technologies are proposed to provide greater bandwidth and improve client/server response times. Among them, Fast Ethernet, or  
100T, provides a non-disruptive, smooth evolution from 10T technology.  
100Mbps Fast Ethernet is a standard specified by the IEEE 802.3 LAN committee. It is an extension of the 10Mbps Ethernet standard with the ability to transmit  
and receive data at 100Mbps, while maintaining the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Ethernet protocol.  
Gigabit Ethernet Technology  
Gigabit Ethernet is an extension of IEEE 802.3 Ethernet utilizing the same packet structure, format, and support for CSMA/CD protocol, full duplex, flow control,  
and management objects, but with a tenfold increase in theoretical throughput over 100Mbps Fast Ethernet and a one hundred-fold increase over 10Mbps  
Ethernet. Since it is compatible with all 10Mbps and 100Mbps Ethernet environments, Gigabit Ethernet provides a straightforward upgrade without wasting a  
company's existing investment in hardware, software, and trained personnel.  
The increased speed and extra bandwidth offered by Gigabit Ethernet are essential to coping with the network bottlenecks that frequently develop as computers  
and their busses get faster and more users use applications that generate more traffic. Upgrading key components, such as your backbone and servers to Gigabit  
Ethernet can greatly improve network response times as well as significantly speed up the traffic between your subnetworks.  
Gigabit Ethernet enables fast optical fibre connections to support video conferencing, complex imaging, and similar data-intensive applications. Likewise, since data  
transfers occur 10 times faster than Fast Ethernet, servers outfitted with Gigabit Ethernet NIC's are able to perform 10 times the number of operations in the  
same amount of time.  
In addition, the phenomenal bandwidth delivered by Gigabit Ethernet is the most cost-effective method to take advantage of today and tomorrow's rapidly  
improving switching and routing internetworking technologies.  
Switching Technology  
Another key development pushing the limits of Ethernet technology is in the field of switching technology. A switch bridges Ethernet packets at the MAC address  
level of the Ethernet protocol transmitting among connected Ethernet or Fast Ethernet LAN segments.  
Switching is a cost-effective way of increasing the total network capacity available to users on a local area network. A switch increases capacity and decreases  
network loading by making it possible for a local area network to be divided into different segments, which are not competing with each other for network  
transmission capacity, and therefore decreasing the load on each segment.  
The Switch acts as a high-speed selective bridge between the individual segments.Traffic that needs to go from one segment to another (from one port to  
another) is automatically forwarded by the Switch, without interfering with any other segments (ports).This allows the total network capacity to be multiplied,  
while still maintaining the same network cabling and adapter cards.  
For Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet networks, a switch is an effective way of eliminating problems of chaining hubs beyond the "two-repeater limit." A switch  
can be used to split parts of the network into different collision domains, for example, making it possible to expand your Fast Ethernet network beyond the 205-  
meter network diameter limit for 100TX networks. Switches supporting both traditional 10Mbps Ethernet and 100Mbps Fast Ethernet are also ideal for bridging  
between existing 10Mbps networks and new 100Mbps networks.  
Switching LAN technology is a marked improvement over the previous generation of network bridges, which were characterized by higher latencies. Routers  
have also been used to segment local area networks, but the cost of a router and the setup and maintenance required make routers relatively impractical.Today's  
switches are an ideal solution to most kinds of local area network congestion problems.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2 Switch Description  
The AT-9724TS has 24 1000T Gigabit ports that may be used in uplinking various network devices to the Switch, including PCs, hubs and other switches to  
provide a gigabit Ethernet uplink in full-duplex mode.  
In addition, the AT-9724TS is equipped with 4 SFP (Small Form Factor Portable) combo ports, which are to be used with fibre-optical transceiver cabling in order  
to uplink various other networking devices for a gigabit link that may span great distances.These 4 SFP ports support full-duplex transmissions, have auto-  
negotiation and can be used with AT-MG8LX10 (1000LX),AT-MG8SX (1000SX) and AT-MG8ZX (1000ZX) transceivers.These four ports are referred to as  
“combo” ports which means that both the SFP ports and the 1000T ports are numbered the same (21–24) and cannot be used simultaneously.Attempting to use  
the ports simultaneously will cause a link down status for the 1000T ports. SFP ports will always have priority over these 1000T ports.  
Also included at the rear of the Switch are two 10-gigabit stacking ports used to stack up to twelve switches in a ring topology.The AT-9724TS may be used as  
the master unit of a switch stack when utilizing these ports and, in total, may provide a stacking solution of up to 288 gigabit ports.  
Note:  
The four SFP combo ports on the Switch, numbered 21–24 cannot be used simultaneously with the corresponding 1000T ports, numbered  
21–24. If both ports are in use at the same time (ex. port 21 of the SFP and port 21 of the 1000T), the SFP ports will take priority over the combo  
ports and render the 1000T ports inoperable.  
1-3 Features  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IEEE 802.3z compliant  
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control in full-duplex compliant  
IEEE 802.3u compliant  
IEEE 802.3ab compliant  
IEEE 802.3ae compliant (for optional XFP module)  
IEEE 802.1p Priority Queues  
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol support.  
IEEE 802.1x Port-based and MAC-based Access Control  
IEEE 802.1QVLAN  
IEEE 802.1D SpanningTree, IEEE 802.1W Rapid SpanningTree and IEEE 802.1s Multiple SpanningTree support  
Stacking support in Ring topology  
Access Control List (ACL) support  
IP Multinetting support  
ProtocolVLAN support  
Single IP Management support  
Access Authentication Control utilizingTACACS, XTACACS,TACACS+ and RADIUS protocols  
Dual Image Firmware  
Simple NetworkTime Protocol support  
MAC Notification support  
System and Port Utilization support  
System Log Support  
High performance switching engine performs forwarding and filtering at full wire speed up to 128Gbps.  
Full- and half-duplex for all gigabit ports. Full duplex allows the switch port to simultaneously transmit and receive data. It only works with  
connections to full-duplex-capable end stations and switches. Connections to a hub must take place at half-duplex.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support broadcast storm filtering  
Non-blocking store and forward switching scheme capability to support rate adaptation and protocol conversion  
Supports by-port Egress/Ingress rate control  
Efficient self-learning and address recognition mechanism enables forwarding rate at wire speed  
Support port-based enable and disable  
Address table: Supports up to 8K MAC addresses per device  
Supports a packet buffer of up to 3 Mbits  
Supports Port-basedVLAN Groups  
PortTrunking with flexible load distribution and fail-over function  
IGMP Snooping support  
Layer 3 support including DVMRP, OSPF and RIP  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
•
•
•
•
SNMP support  
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Secure Shell (SSH) support  
Port Mirroring support  
MIB support for:  
RFC1213 MIB II  
RFC1493 Bridge  
RFC1757 RMON  
RFC1643 Ether-like MIB  
RFC2233 Interface MIB  
IF MIB  
Private MIB  
RFC2674 for 802.1p  
IEEE 802.1x MIB  
•
•
RS-232 DCE console port for Switch management  
Provides parallel LED display for port status such as link/act, speed, etc.  
1-4 Ports  
Twenty-four (24) 1000T combo ports that may be used in uplinking various network devices to the Switch, including PCs, hubs and other switches to provide a  
gigabit Ethernet uplink in full-duplex mode.  
Four (4) high-performance SFP ports for a fibre-optic connection to various network connections, for use over great distances.  
Two 10-gigabit stacking ports at the rear of the Switch for stacking switches utilizing ring topology.  
RS-232 DCE Diagnostic port (console port) for setting up and managing the Switch via a connection to a console terminal or PC using a terminal emulation  
program.  
Installing the SFP ports  
The Switch is equipped with four SFP (Small Form Factor Portable) ports, which are to be used with fibre-optical transceiver cabling in order to uplink various  
other networking devices for a gigabit link that may span great distances.  
Figure 1- 1. Inserting the fibre-optic transceivers into the AT-9724TS  
1-5 Front Panel Components  
The front panel of the Switch consists of LED indicators for Power, Master, Console, RPS, SIO (stacking), a seven-segment Stack ID LED and for Link/Act for each  
port on the Switch, as well as 24 1000T ports, 4 SFP gigabit Ethernet ports and a RS-232 DCE console port for Switch management.  
17  
18  
23  
24  
13  
15  
16  
19  
20  
21  
22  
9
1
3
5
6
7
11  
12  
Power  
1000  
AT-9724TS  
Stack ID  
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23  
Master Link  
SIO  
1
Act  
Console  
24  
23  
21  
22  
1000  
Link 2  
Act  
RPS  
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24  
2
2
4
8
10  
14  
Figure 1- 2. Front PanelView of the AT-9724TS as shipped  
Comprehensive LED indicators display the status of the Switch and the network.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LED Indicators  
The Switch supports LED indicators for Power, Master, Console, RPS, SIO (stacking indicators), a seven-segment Stack ID LED and Port LEDs.The following  
shows the LED indicators for the Switch along with an explanation of each indicator.  
Figure 1- 3. LED Indicators  
LED Description  
Power  
This LED will light green after the Switch is powered on to indicate the ready state of the device.The indicator is dark when the Switch is  
powered off.  
Master  
Console  
This LED will light solid green when the Switch is configured to be a master switch of a switch stack in a ring topology or when it is in use as a  
stand-alone switch.This LED will remain dark if the Switch is not configured to be a master switch in a switch stack.  
This LED should blink during the Power-On SelfTest (POST).When the POST is finished successfully, the LED goes dark.This indicator will light  
solid green when the Switch is being logged into via out-of-band/local console management through the RS-232 console port in the front of the  
Switch using a straight-through serial cable.  
This LED will light solid amber if the Power-On-Self-Test has failed.  
RPS  
This LED will be lit when the internal power has failed and the RPS has taken over the power supply to the Switch. Otherwise, it will remain  
dark.  
Port LEDs One row of LEDs for each port is located above the ports on the front panel.The first LED is for the top port and the second one is for the  
bottom ports.A solid light denotes activity on the port while a blinking light indicates a valid link.These LEDs will remain dark if there is no  
link/activity on the port.  
Stacking Ports  
(SIO)  
There are two LEDs in the front of the Switch marked SIO, and they relate to the two 10-gigabit stacking ports at the rear of the Switch.These  
LEDs are marked 1 and 2 and will light solid green to denote activity on the port, while a blinking light will indicate a valid link.  
Stack ID  
These two seven-segment LEDs display the current switch stack order of the Switch while in use. Possible numbers to be displayed range from  
1-12 in use.  
1-6 Rear Panel Components  
The rear panel of the Switch contains an AC power connector, two 10-gigabit stacking ports and a redundant power supply connector.  
Figure 1- 4. Rear panel view of the Switch  
The AC power connector is a standard three-pronged connector that supports the power cord. Plug-in the female connector of the provided power cord into  
this socket, and the male side of the cord into a power outlet.The Switch automatically adjusts its power setting to any supply voltage in the range from 100 ~  
240VAC at 50 ~ 60 Hz.  
The rear panel also includes an outlet for an optional external power supply.When power fails, the optional external RPS will take over all the power  
immediately and automatically.  
1-7 Side-Panel Components  
The right-hand side panel of the Switch contains 2 system fans, while the left hand panel includes a heat vent.  
The system fans are used to dissipate heat.The sides of the system also provide heat vents to serve the same purpose. Do not block these openings, and leave at  
least 6 inches of space at the rear and sides of the Switch for proper ventilation. Be reminded that without proper heat dissipation and air circulation, system  
components might overheat, which could lead to system failure.  
Figure 1- 5. Side Panels  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 - Installation  
2-1 Package Contents  
2-2 BeforeYou Connect to the Network  
2-3 Installing the SwitchWithout the Rack  
2-4 Rack Installation  
2-5 Power On  
2-6 Power Failure  
2-7 Redundant Power System  
2-1 Package Contents  
Open the shipping carton of the Switch and carefully unpack its contents.The carton should contain the following items:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One AT-9724TS Switch  
One AC power cord  
One Stacking Cable  
One CD which includes the AT-9724TS Manual, and Net.Cover documents  
OneWarranty Card  
Mounting kit (two brackets and screws)  
Four rubber feet with adhesive backing  
RS-232 console cable  
If any item is found missing or damaged, please contact your local AlliedTelesyn Reseller for replacement.  
2-2 Before You Connect to the Network  
The site where you install the Switch may greatly affect its performance. Please follow these guidelines for setting up the Switch.  
•
•
•
•
Install the Switch on a sturdy, level surface that can support at least 6.6lb. (3kg) of weight. Do not place heavy objects on the Switch.  
The power outlet should be within 1.82 metres (6 feet) of the Switch.  
Visually inspect the power cord and see that it is fully secured to the AC power port.  
Make sure that there is proper heat dissipation from and adequate ventilation around the Switch. Leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) of space at the front  
and rear of the Switch for ventilation.  
•
•
•
Install the Switch in a fairly cool and dry place for the acceptable temperature and humidity operating ranges.  
Install the Switch in a site free from strong electromagnetic field generators (such as motors), vibration, dust, and direct exposure to sunlight.  
When installing the Switch on a level surface, attach the rubber feet to the bottom of the device.The rubber feet cushion the Switch, protect the  
casing from scratches and prevent it from scratching other surfaces.  
•
Ensure you program the Switch with a valid IP address – see section xxxx.  
2-3 Installing the Switch without a Rack  
When installing the Switch on a desktop or shelf, the rubber feet included with the Switch should first be attached. Attach these cushioning feet on the bottom  
at each corner of the device. Allow enough ventilation space between the Switch and any other objects in the vicinity.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 2- 1. Prepare Switch for installation on a desktop or shelf  
2-4 Installing the Switch in a Rack  
The Switch can be mounted in a standard 19" rack. Use the following diagrams to guide you.  
Fasten the mounting brackets to the Switch using the screws provided.With the brackets attached securely, you can mount the Switch in a standard rack as  
shown in Figure 2-2.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5 Mounting the Switch in a Standard 19" Rack  
Figure 2- 2. Installing Switch in a rack  
2-5 Power On  
Plug one end of the AC power cord into the power connector of the Switch and the other end into the local power source outlet.  
After the Switch is powered on, the LED indicators will momentarily blink.This blinking of the LED indicators represents a reset of the system.  
2-6 Power Failure  
As a precaution, in the event of a power failure, unplug the Switch.When power is resumed, plug the Switch back in.  
2-7 External Redundant Power System  
The Switch supports an external redundant power system.  
Figure 2- 3.The AT-9724TS with the AT-RPS7000 Redundant External Power Supply  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Connecting the Switch  
•
•
•
•
3-1 Switch to End Node  
3-2 Switch to Hub or Switch  
3-3 Connecting to Network Backbone or Server  
3-4 Stacking and the AT-9724TS  
3-1 Switch To End Node  
End nodes include PCs outfitted with a 10, 100 or 1000Mbps RJ45 Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC) and most routers.  
An end node can be connected to the Switch via a twisted-pair UTP/STP cable.The end node should be connected to any of the 24 1000T ports of the Switch.  
Figure 3- 1. Switch connected to an end node  
The Link/Act LEDs for each UTP port will light green or amber when the link is valid.A blinking LED indicates packet activity on that port.  
3-2 Switch to Hub or Switch  
These connections can be accomplished in a number of ways using a normal cable.  
•
•
•
•
A 10T hub or switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted-pair Category 3, 4 or 5 UTP/STP cable.  
A 100TX hub or switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted-pair Category 5 UTP/STP cable.  
A 1000T switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 5e UTP/STP cable.  
A switch supporting a fibre-optic uplink can be connected to the Switch’s SFP ports via fibre-optic cabling.  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
1
3
5
7
9
11  
Power  
1000  
Master Link  
Act  
AT-9724TS  
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23  
Stack ID  
SIO  
1
Console  
24  
21  
22  
23  
1000  
RPS  
Link  
Act  
2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24  
2
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
22  
20  
24  
UTP cable  
13  
15  
17  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
1
3
5
6
7
9
11  
12  
Power  
1000  
Master Link  
Act  
AT-9724TS  
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23  
Stack ID  
SIO  
Console  
1
2
24  
21  
22  
23  
1000  
RPS  
Link  
Act  
2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24  
2
4
8
10  
14  
16  
18  
Figure 3- 2. Switch connected to a port on a hub or switch using either a straight or crossover cable – any normal cable is fine  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
13  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
1
3
5
6
7
9
11  
12  
Power  
1000  
AT-9724TS  
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23  
Stack ID  
Master Link  
SIO  
1
Act  
Console  
21  
22  
23  
24  
1000  
RPS  
Link  
Act  
2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24  
2
2
4
8
10  
14  
Optical fibre cable  
13  
15  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
1
3
5
6
7
9
11  
12  
Power  
1000  
AT-9724TS  
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23  
Stack ID  
Master Link  
SIO  
Act  
Console  
1
2
21  
22  
23  
24  
1000  
RPS  
Link  
Act  
2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24  
2
4
8
10  
14  
16  
Figure 3- 3. Switch connected to switch using fibre-optic cabling  
3-3 Connecting To Network Backbone or Server  
The 4 combo SFP ports and the 24 1000T ports are ideal for uplinking to a network backbone, server or server farm.The copper ports operate at a speed of  
1000, 100 or 10Mbps in full or half duplex mode.The fibre-optic ports can operate at 1000Mbps in full duplex mode only.  
Connections to the Gigabit Ethernet ports are made using fibre-optic cable or Category 5e copper cable, depending on the type of port. A valid connection is  
indicated when the Link LED is lit.  
3-4 Stacking and the AT-9724TS  
The AT-9724TS is equipped with two 10-gigabit stacking ports at the rear of the Switch, as seen in Figure 3-5.These stacking ports may be used to stack the AT-  
9724TS to a master switch to be used in a switch stack.  
Figure 3- 5. SIO 1 and SIO 2 Stacking ports at the rear of the AT-9724TS  
These two stacking ports, named SIO 1 and SIO 2 can be used with other stacking switches for a scalable stacking solution of up to 288 ports in a ring topology.  
These two stacking ports have corresponding LEDs at the front of the Switch, labelled SIO 1 and SIO 2 will light solid green whenever the corresponding port is  
in use.  
Figure 3- 6. Stacking LEDs (SIO) at the front of the AT-9724TS  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 3- 8. Stacking in a Ring Architecture  
Note:  
The Do not connect the stacked Switch group to the network until you have properly configured all Switches for stacking. An improperly  
configured Switch stack can cause a broadcast storm.  
Stacking Limitations Utilizing a Ring Topology  
There is a limit to the number of AT-9724TS Switches that can be stacked in a ring topology. A maximum of 12 switches can be stacked.  
Note:  
All Switches must have the same firmware rev.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
Chapter 4 - Introduction to Switch Management  
4-1 AT-9724TS Gigabit Layer 3 Switch Management Options  
4-2Web-based Management Interface  
4-3 SNMP-Based Management  
4-4 Command Line Console InterfaceThroughThe Serial Port  
4-5 Connecting the Console Port (RS-232 DCE)  
4-6 FirstTime Connecting toThe Switch  
4-7 Password Protection  
4-8 SNMP Settings  
4-9 IP Address Assignment  
4-10 Connecting Devices to the Switch  
4-1 AT-9724TS Gigabit Layer 3 Switch Management Options  
This system may be managed out-of-band through the console port on the front panel or in-band usingTelnet.The user may also choose the web-based  
management, accessible through a web browser.  
4-2 Web-based Management Interface  
After you have successfully installed the Switch, you can configure the Switch, monitor the LED panel, and display statistics graphically using a web browser, such  
as Netscape Navigator (version 6.2 and higher) or Microsoft® Internet Explorer (version 5.0).  
4-3 SNMP-Based Management  
You can manage the Switch with an SNMP-compatible console program.The Switch supports SNMP version 1.0, version 2.0 and version 3.0.The SNMP agent  
decodes the incoming SNMP messages and responds to requests with MIB objects stored in the database.The SNMP agent updates the MIB objects to generate  
statistics and counters.  
4-4 Command Line Console Interface Through The Serial Port  
You can also connect a computer or terminal to the serial console port to access the Switch.The command-line-driven interface provides complete access to all  
Switch management features.  
4-5 Connecting the Console Port (RS-232 DCE)  
The Switch provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring the Switch.This port is a female  
DB-9 connector, implemented as a data terminal equipment (DTE) connection.  
To use the console port, you need the following equipment:  
•
•
A terminal or a computer with both a serial port and the ability to emulate a terminal.  
A null modem or crossover RS-232 cable with a female DB-9 connector for the console port on the Switch (supplied with the switch).  
To connect a terminal to the console port:  
1.  
2.  
Connect the female connector of the RS-232 cable directly to the console port on the Switch, and tighten the captive retaining screws.  
Connect the other end of the cable to a terminal or to the serial connector of a computer running terminal emulation software. Set the terminal  
emulation software as follows:  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2).  
Set the data rate to 115200 baud.  
Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.  
Set flow control to none.  
Under Properties, selectVT100 for Emulation mode.  
SelectTerminal keys for Function,Arrow, and Ctrl keys. Ensure that you selectTerminal keys (notWindows keys).  
Note:  
When you use HyperTerminal with the Microsoft®Windows® 2000 operating system, ensure that you haveWindows 2000 Service Pack 2  
or later installed.Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 allows you to use arrow keys in HyperTerminal'sVT100 emulation. See www.microsoft.com for  
information onWindows 2000 service packs.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
9.  
After you have correctly set up the terminal, plug the power cable into the power receptacle on the back of the Switch.The boot sequence appears in  
the terminal.  
10.  
11.  
After the boot sequence completes, the console login screen displays.  
If you have not logged into the command line interface (CLI) program, press the Enter key at the User name and password prompts.There is one  
default user name and password for the Switch. User names and passwords must first be created by the administrator. If you have previously set up  
user accounts, log in and continue to configure the Switch.  
12.  
13.  
Enter the commands to complete your desired tasks. Many commands require administrator-level access privileges. Read the next section for more  
information on setting up user accounts. See the AT-9724TS Command Line Interface Reference Manual on the documentation CD for a list of all  
commands and additional information on using the CLI.  
When you have completed your tasks, exit the session with the logout command or close the emulator program.  
Make sure the terminal or PC you are using to make this connection is configured to match these settings.  
If you are having problems making this connection on a PC, make sure the emulation is set toVT-100.You will be able to set the emulation by clicking on the File  
menu in you HyperTerminal window, clicking on Properties in the drop-down menu, and then clicking the Settings tab.This is where you will find the  
Emulation options. If you still do not see anything, try rebooting the Switch by disconnecting its power supply.  
Once connected to the console, the screen below will appear on your console screen.This is where the user will enter commands to perform all the available  
management functions.The Switch will prompt the user to enter a user name and a password. Upon the initial connection, there is no user name or password  
and therefore just press enter twice to access the command line interface.  
4-6 First Time Connecting to the Switch  
The Switch supports user-based security that can allow you to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the Switch or changing its settings.This section tells  
how to log onto the Switch.  
Note:  
When you first connect to the Switch, you will be presented with the first login screen (shown below).  
Note: Press Ctrl+R to refresh the screen.This command can be used at any time to force the console program in the Switch to refresh the  
The passwords used to access the Switch are case-sensitive; therefore, "S" is not the same as "s."  
console screen.  
Figure 4- 1. Initial screen, first time connecting to the Switch  
The initial username and password are:  
Username:  
Password:  
manager  
friend  
You will be given access to the command prompt AT-9724TS:4# shown below.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 4- 2. Command Prompt  
Note:  
The first user automatically gets Administrator level privileges. It is recommended to create at least one Admin-level user account for the  
Switch.  
4-7 Password Protection  
One of the first tasks when settings up the Switch is to create user accounts. If you log in using a predefined administrator-level user name, you have privileged  
access to the Switch's management software.  
After your initial login, define new passwords for both default user names to prevent unauthorized access to the Switch, and record the passwords for future  
reference.  
To create an administrator-level account for the Switch, do the following:  
At the CLI login prompt, enter create account admin followed by the <user name> and press the Enter key.  
You will be asked to provide a password.Type the <password> used for the administrator account being created and press the Enter key.  
You will be prompted to enter the same password again to verify it.Type the same password and press the Enter key.  
Successful creation of the new administrator account will be verified by a Success message.  
Note:  
Passwords are case sensitive. User names and passwords can be up to 15 characters in length.  
The sample below illustrates a successful creation of a new administrator-level account with the user name "newmanager".  
AT-9724TS:4#create account admin newmanager  
Command: create account admin newmanager  
Enter a case-sensitive new password:********  
Enter the new password again for confirmation:********  
Success.  
AT-9724TS:4#  
ƽ
Caution: CLI configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the Switch is rebooted.To save all your  
configuration changes in nonvolatile storage, you must use the save command to copy the running configuration file to the startup configuration.  
4-8 SNMP Settings  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an OSI Layer 7 (Application Layer) designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices. SNMP  
enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways, routers, switches, and other network devices. Use SNMP to configure system  
features for proper operation, monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch, switch group or network.  
Managed devices that support SNMP include software (referred to as an agent), which runs locally on the device.A defined set of variables (managed objects) is  
maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device.These objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB), which provides a standard  
presentation of the information controlled by the on-board SNMP agent. SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to  
access this information over the network.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The AT-9724TS supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3.You can specify which version of SNMP you want to use to monitor and control the Switch.The three  
versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device.  
In SNMP v.1 and v.2, user authentication is accomplished using 'community strings', which function like passwords.The remote user SNMP application and the  
Switch SNMP must use the same community string. SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored (dropped).  
The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v.1 and v.2 management access are:  
public – Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects.  
private – Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
SNMP v.3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts.The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that  
are allowed to act as SNMP managers.The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager.  
The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges.The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP  
managers.Thus, you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read-only information or receive traps using SNMP v.1 while assigning a  
higher level of security to another group, granting read/write privileges using SNMP v.3.  
Using SNMP v.3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management  
functions.The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier (OID) associated with a specific MIB.An additional layer of security is  
available for SNMP v.3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted.To read more about how to configure SNMP v.3 settings for the Switch read the section  
entitled Management.  
Traps  
Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch.The events can be as serious as a reboot (someone accidentally turned OFF  
the Switch), or less serious like a port status change.The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient (or network manager).Typical traps include  
trap messages for Authentication Failure,Topology Change and Broadcast/Multicast Storm.  
MIBs  
Management and counter information are stored by the Switch in the Management Information Base (MIB).The Switch uses the standard MIB-II Management  
Information Base module. Consequently, values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP-based network management software. In addition to the  
standard MIB-II, the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base.The proprietary MIB may also be  
retrieved by specifying the MIB Object Identifier. MIB values can be either read-only or read-write.  
4-9 IP Address Assignment  
Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or otherTCP/IP application (for example  
BOOTP,TFTP).The Switch's default IP address is 10.0.0.1.You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address  
scheme.  
The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory.This MAC address cannot be changed, and can be found by entering the command "show  
switch" into the command line interface, as shown below.  
Figure 4- 3.“show switch” command  
The Switch's MAC address can also be found from theWeb management program on the Switch Information (Basic Settings) window in the  
Configuration menu.  
The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with theWeb-based manager.The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP  
or DHCP protocols, in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known.  
The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface (CLI) over the console serial port as follows:  
Starting at the command line prompt, enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy.Where the x's represent  
the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y's represent the corresponding subnet mask.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alternatively, you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z.Where the x's represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface  
named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation.  
The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the  
Switch'sTelnet orWeb-based management agent.  
Figure 4- 4.Assigning the Switch an IP Address  
In the above example, the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10.53.13.144 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0.The system message Success indicates that the  
command was executed successfully.The Switch can now be configured and managed viaTelnet and the CLI or via theWeb-based management.  
4-10 Connecting Devices to the Switch  
After you assign IP addresses to the Switch, you can connect devices to the Switch.  
To connect a device to an SFP transceiver port:  
•
•
•
Use your cabling requirements to select an appropriate SFP transceiver type.  
Insert the SFP transceiver (sold separately) into the SFP transceiver slot.  
Use the appropriate network cabling to connect a device to the connectors on the SFP transceiver.  
ƽ
Caution: When the SFP transceiver acquires a link, the associated integrated 10/100/1000T port is disabled.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
Chapter 5 - Introduction to Web-based Switch Configuration  
5-1 Introduction  
5-2 Login toWeb manager  
5-3Web-Based User Interface  
5-4 Basic Setup  
5-5 Reboot  
5-6 Basic Switch Setup  
5-7 Network Management  
5-8 Switch Utilities  
5-9 Network Monitoring  
5-10 IGMP Snooping Status  
5-1 Introduction  
All software functions of the AT-9724TS can be managed, configured and monitored via the embedded web-based (HTML) interface.The Switch can be managed  
from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Netscape Navigator/Communicator or Microsoft Internet Explorer.The  
browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol.  
TheWeb-based management module and the Console program (andTelnet) are different ways to access the same internal switching software and configure it.  
Thus, all settings encountered in web-based management are the same as those found in the console program.  
5-2 Login to Web Manager  
To begin managing your Switch, simply run the browser you have installed on your computer and point it to the IP address you have defined for the device.The  
URL in the address bar should read something like: http://123.123.123.123, where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch.  
Note:  
The Factory default IP address for the Switch is 10.0.0.1.  
Figure 5- 1. Login Button  
This opens the management module's user authentication window, as seen below.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3 Web-based User Interface  
The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management screens, allows you to view performance statistics, and permits you to  
graphically monitor the system status.  
Areas of the User Interface  
The figure below shows the user interface.The user interface is divided into 3 distinct areas as described in the table.  
Figure 5- 2. MainWeb-Manager Screen  
Area  
Function  
1
2
Select the menu or window to be displayed.The folder icons can be opened to display the hyperlinked menu buttons and  
subfolders contained within them. Click the AlliedTelesyn logo to go to the AlliedTelesyn website.  
Presents a graphical near real-time image of the front panel of the Switch.This area displays the Switch's ports and expansion  
modules, showing port activity, duplex mode, or flow control, depending on the specified mode.Various areas of the graphic can  
be selected for performing management functions, including port configuration.  
3
Presents switch information based on your selection and the entry of configuration data.  
ƽ
Caution: Any changes made to the Switch configuration during the current session must be saved in the Save Changes web menu (explained  
below) or use the command line interface (CLI) command save.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
Web Pages  
Configurations – Contains screens concerning configurations for IP Address, Switch Information,Advanced Settings, Port Configuration, IGMP, SpanningTree,  
Forwarding Filtering,VLANs, Port Bandwidth, SNTP Settings, Port Security, QoS, MAC Notification, LACP,Access ProfileTable, System Log Servers, PAE Access  
Entity, and Layer 3 IP Networking.  
Security Management – Contains screens concerning configurations for Security IP, User Accounts,Access Authentication Control (TACACS), Secure  
Sockets Layer (SSL), and Secure Shell (SSH).  
SNMP Manager – Contains screens and windows concerning the implementation and upkeep of the SNMP Manager of the Switch.  
Monitoring – Contains screens concerning monitoring the Switch, pertaining to Port Utilization, CPU Utilization, Packets, Errors Size, MAC Address, IGMP  
Snooping Group, IGMP Snooping Forwarding,VLAN Status, Router Port, Port Access Control and Layer 3 Feature.  
Maintenance – Contains screens concerning configurations and information about Switch maintenance, includingTFTP Services, CF Services, Dual Image  
Information, Switch History, PingTest, Save Changes, Reboot Services and Logout.  
Single IP Management – Contains screens concerning information on Single IP Management, including SIM Settings,Topology and Firmware/Configuration  
downloads.  
Note:  
Be sure to configure the user name and password in the User Accounts menu before connecting the Switch to the greater network.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
Chapter 6 - Configuring The Switch  
6-1 Switch Information  
6-2 IP Address  
6-3 Box Information  
6-4 Advanced Settings  
6-5 Port Configuration  
6-6 Port Description  
6-7 Port Mirroring  
6-8 Link Aggregation  
6-9 LACP Port Setting  
6-10MAC Notification  
6-11GMP  
6-12 SpanningTree  
6-13 Forward & Filtering  
6-14VLANs  
6-15Traffic Control  
6-16 Port Security  
6-17 Port Lock Entries  
6-18 QoS  
6-19 System Log Servers  
6-20 SNTP Setting  
6-21 Access ProfileTable  
6-22 Port Access Entity  
6-23 Layer 3 IP Networking  
6-1 Switch Information  
The subsections below describe how to change some of the basic settings for the Switch such as changing IP settings and assigning user names and passwords for  
management access privileges, as well as how to save the changes and restart the Switch.  
Click the Switch Information link in the Configuration menu.  
Figure 6- 1. Switch Information – Basic Settings window  
The Switch Information window shows the Switch's MAC Address (assigned by the factory and unchangeable), the Boot PROM, Firmware  
Version, and Hardware Version.This information is helpful to keep track of PROM and firmware updates and to obtain the Switch's MAC address for entry  
into another network device's address table, if necessary.The user may also enter a System Name, System Location and System Contact to aid in  
defining the Switch, to the user's preference.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2 IP Address  
The IP Address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet. If the Switch IP address has not yet been changed,  
read the introduction of the AT-9724TS Command Line Interface Reference Manual or return to Chapter 4 of this manual for more information.  
To change IP settings using the web manager you must access the IP Address menu located in the Configuration folder.  
To configure the Switch's IP address:  
Open the Configuration folder and click the IP Address menu link.The web manager will display the Switch's current IP settings in the IP configuration  
menu, as seen below.  
Figure 6- 2. IP Address Settings window  
To manually assign the Switch's IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select Manual from the Get IP From drop-down menu.  
Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask.  
If you want to access the Switch from a different subnet from the one it is installed on, enter the IP address of the Default Gateway. If you will  
manage the Switch from the subnet on which it is installed, you can leave the default address (0.0.0.0) in this field.  
4.  
If noVLANs have been previously configured on the Switch, you can use the default VLAN Name.The defaultVLAN contains all of the Switch ports  
as members. IfVLANs have been previously configured on the Switch, you will need to enter the VLAN ID of theVLAN that contains the port  
connected to the management station that will access the Switch.The Switch will allow management access from stations with the sameVID listed  
here.  
Note:  
The Switch's factory default IP address is 10.0.0.1 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0 and a default gateway of 0.0.0.0.  
To use the BOOTP or DHCP protocols to assign the Switch an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address:  
Use the Get IP From: <Manual> pull-down menu to choose from BOOTP or DHCP.This selects how the Switch will be assigned an IP address on the next  
reboot.  
The IP Address Settings options are:  
Parameter  
BOOTP  
Description  
The Switch will send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up.The BOOTP protocol allows IP  
addresses, network masks, and default gateways to be assigned by a central BOOTP server. If this option is set,  
the Switch will first look for a BOOTP server to provide it with this information before using the default or  
previously entered settings.  
DHCP  
The Switch will send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered up.The DHCP protocol allows IP  
addresses, network masks, and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server. If this option is set, the  
Switch will first look for a DHCP server to provide it with this information before using the default or  
previously entered settings.  
Manual  
Allows the entry of an IP address, Subnet Mask, and a Default Gateway for the Switch.These fields should be of  
the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each xxx is a number (represented in decimal form) between 0 and 255.This  
address should be a unique address on the network assigned for use by the network administrator.  
Subnet Mask A  
Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on. Should be of the form  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each xxx is a number (represented in decimal) between 0 and 255.The value  
should be 255.0.0.0 for a Class A network, 255.255.0.0 for a Class B network, and 255.255.255.0 for a Class C  
network, but custom subnet masks are allowed.  
Default Gateway  
IP address that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet should be  
sent.This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway. If your network is not part of an  
intranet, or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your local network, you can leave this field  
unchanged.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
VLAN Name  
This allows the entry of aVLAN Name from which a management station will be allowed to manage the Switch  
usingTCP/IP (in-band via web manager orTelnet). Management stations that are onVLANs other than the one  
entered here will not be able to manage the Switch in-band unless their IP addresses are entered in the  
Security IP Management menu. IfVLANs have not yet been configured for the Switch, the defaultVLAN contains  
all of the Switch's ports.There are no entries in the Security IP Management table, by default, so any  
management station that can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a managementVLAN is  
specified or Management Station IP Addresses are assigned.  
Click Apply to let your changes take effect.  
Setting the Switch's IP Address using the Console Interface  
Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or otherTCP/IP  
application (for example BOOTP,TFTP).The Switch's default IP address is 10.0.0.1.You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the  
specification of your networking address scheme.  
The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with theWeb-based manager.The Switch IP address can be automatically  
set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols, in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known.The IP address may be set using  
the Command Line Interface (CLI) over the console serial port as follows:  
Starting at the command line prompt, enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy.Where the x's  
represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y's represent the corresponding subnet mask.  
Alternatively, you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z.Where the x's represent the IP address to be assigned  
to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation.  
The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management  
station to the Switch'sTelnet orWeb-based management agent.  
The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully.The Switch can now be configured and managed viaTelnet  
and the CLI or via theWeb-based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch.  
Advanced Settings  
The Advanced Settings window contains the main settings for all major functions for the Switch.To view the Advanced Settings window, click its link in  
the Configuration folder.This will enable the following window to be viewed and configured.  
Figure 6- 3. Switch Information (Advanced Settings)  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Serial Port Auto Logout Time Select the logout time used for the console interface.This automatically logs the user out after an idle period of  
time, as defined. Choose from the following options: 2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 15 Minutes or Never.The  
default setting is 10 minutes.  
Serial Port Baud Rate  
This field specifies the baud rate for the serial port on the Switch.This field’s menu is set at 115200 and cannot  
be changed.  
MAC Address Aging Time  
(10-1000000)  
This field specifies the length of time a learned MAC Address will remain in the forwarding table without being  
accessed (that is, how long a learned MAC Address is allowed to remain idle).The default age-out time for the  
Switch is 300 seconds.To change this, type in a different value representing the MAC address age-out time in  
seconds.The MAC Address Aging Time can be set to any value between 10 and 1,000,000 seconds.The  
default setting is 300 seconds.  
IGMP Snooping  
To enable system-wide IGMP Snooping capability select Enabled. IGMP snooping is Disabled by default. Enabling  
IGMP snooping allows you to specify use of a multicast router only (see below).To configure IGMP Snooping  
for individualVLANs, use the IGMP Snooping page under the IGMP Snooping folder.  
Multicast router Only  
This field specifies that the Switch should only forward all multicast traffic to a multicast-enabled router, if  
enabled. Otherwise, the Switch will forward all multicast traffic to any IP router.The default is Disabled.  
GVRP Status  
Telnet Status  
Use this pull-down menu to enable or disable GVRP on the Switch.  
Telnet configuration is Enabled by default. If you do not want to allow configuration of the system through  
Telnet choose Disabled.  
Telnet TCP Port Number  
(1-65535)  
TheTCP port number.TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535.The "well-known"TCP port for the  
Telnet protocol is 23.  
Web Status  
Web-based management is Enabled by default. If you choose to disable this by selecting Disabled, you will lose  
the ability to configure the system through the web interface as soon as these settings are applied.  
RMON Status  
Remote monitoring (RMON) of the Switch is Enabled or Disabled here.  
Link Aggregation Algorithm  
The algorithm that the Switch uses to balance the load across the ports that make up the port trunk group is  
defined by this definition. Choose MAC Source, MAC Destination, MAC Src & Dest, IP Source, IP Destination or IP Src  
& Dest (See the Link Aggregation section of this manual).  
Switch 802.1x  
The Switch’s 802.1x function may be enabled by port or by MAC Address; the default is Disabled. This field must  
be enabled to view and configure certain windows for 802.1x. More information regarding 802.1x, its functions  
and implementation can be found later in this section, under the Port Access Entity folder.  
Port-Based 802.1x specifies that ports configured for 802.1x are initialized based on the port number only and  
are subject to any authorization parameters configured.  
MAC-based Authorization specifies that ports configured for 802.1x are initialized based on the port number  
and the MAC address of the computer being authorized and are then subject to any authorization parameters  
configured.  
Auth Protocol  
The user may use the pull down menu to choose between radius eap and radius pap for the 802.1x  
authentication protocol on the Switch.The default setting is radius eap.  
HOL Prevention  
Jumbo Frame  
Syslog State  
This field will enable or disable Head of Line Prevention on the Switch.The default is Enabled.  
This field will enable or disable the Jumbo Frame function on the Switch.The default is Disabled.  
Enables or disables Syslog State; default is Disabled.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
6.3 Box Information  
The Box Information Configuration screen can be found in the Configuration folder under the heading Box Information.This window is used to  
configure the Master switch of a switch stack.The Master switch is the switch that will be used to configure the software applications regarding the switch stack.  
Figure 6- 4. Box Information Configuration window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Current Box ID  
New Box ID  
Box Type  
The current Box ID of the Master switch in the stack.  
The new box ID of the Master switch in the stack.  
The user may choose the model name of the Master switch in a stack to be the main configuring switch of that  
stack.  
Priority  
Displays the priority ID of the Switch.The lower the number, the higher the priority.The box (switch) with the  
lowest priority number in the stack is the Master switch.  
Information configured in this screen may be found in the Monitoring folder under Stack Information.  
6-4 Port Configuration  
This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for individual physical ports, including port speed and address learning. Clicking  
on Port Configurations in the Configuration menu will display the following window for the user:  
Figure 6- 5. Port Configuration andThe Port InformationTable window  
To configure switch ports:  
1.  
2.  
Choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From…To… port pull-down menus, and the Unit ID of the Switch to be configured.  
Use the remaining pull-down menus to configure the parameters described below:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Parameter  
Description  
State  
Toggle the State <Enabled> field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports.  
Speed/Duplex  
Toggle the Speed/Duplex field to either select the speed and duplex/half-duplex state of the port. Auto  
denotes auto-negotiation between 10 and 100Mbps devices, in full- or half-duplex.The Auto setting allows the  
port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the port is connected to can handle, and then to  
use those settings.The other options are Auto, 10M/Half, 10M/Full, 100M/Half and 100M/Full, 1000M/Full_M and  
1000M/Full_S.There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto.  
The Switch allows the user to configure two types of gigabit connections; 1000M/Full_M and 1000M/Full_S.  
Gigabit connections are only supported in full duplex connections and take on certain characteristics that are  
different from the other choices listed.  
The 1000M/Full_M (master) and 1000M/Full_S (slave) parameters refer to connections running a 1000T cable  
for connection between the Switch port and other device capable of a gigabit connection.The master setting  
(1000M/Full_M) will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex, speed and physical layer type.The  
master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers.  
This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers.The timing  
control is set on a master physical layer by a local source.The slave setting (1000M/Full_S) uses loop timing,  
where the timing comes form a data stream received from the master. If one connection is set for  
1000M/Full_M, the other side of the connection must be set for 1000M/Full_S.Any other configuration will  
result in a link down status for both ports.  
Flow Control  
Learning  
Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations. Ports configured for full-duplex use  
802.3x flow control, half-duplex ports use backpressure flow control, and Auto ports use an automatic selection  
of the two.The default is Disabled.  
Enable or disable MAC address learning for the selected ports.When Enabled, destination and source MAC  
addresses are automatically listed in the forwarding table.When learning is Disabled, MAC addresses must be  
manually entered into the forwarding table.This is sometimes done for reasons of security or efficiency. See the  
section on Forwarding/Filtering for information on entering MAC addresses into the forwarding table.  
The default setting is Disabled.  
Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch.  
6-5 Port Description  
The AT-9724TS supports a port description feature where the user may name various ports on the Switch.To assign names to various ports, click the Port  
Description on the Configuration menu:  
Figure 6- 6. Port Description Setting and Port DescriptionTable window  
Use the From and To pull down menu to choose a port or range of ports to describe and Unit to choose the Switch in the switch stack, and then enter a  
description of the port(s). Click Apply to set the descriptions in the Port Description Table.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6 Port Mirroring  
The Switch allows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port.You can attach a monitoring device to the  
mirrored port, such as a sniffer or an RMON probe, to view details about the packets passing through the first port.This is useful for network monitoring and  
troubleshooting purposes.To view the Setup Port Mirroring window, click Port Mirroring in the Configuration folder.  
Figure 6- 7. Setup Port Mirroring window  
To configure a mirror port:  
•
•
•
Select the Source Port from where you want to copy frames and the Target Port, which receives the copies from the source port.  
Select the Source Direction, Ingress, Egress, or Both and change the Status drop-down menu to Enabled.  
Click Apply to let the changes take effect.  
Note:  
You cannot mirror a fast port onto a slower port. For example, if you try to mirror the traffic from a 100Mbps port onto a 10Mbps port,  
this can cause throughput problems.The port you are copying frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to which  
you are sending the copies.Also, the target port for the mirroring cannot be a member of a trunk group. Please note a target port and a source port  
cannot be the same port.  
6-7 Link Aggregation  
Understanding Port Trunk Groups  
Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data pipeline.  
The AT-9724TS supports up to 32 port trunk groups with 2 to 8 ports in each group.A potential bit rate of 8000Mbps can be achieved.  
10/100/1000Mbps Backbone Switch  
1
3
5
6
7
2
4
8
Port Trunk Group  
13  
15  
16  
17  
19  
21  
22  
23  
24  
1
3
5
6
7
9
11  
12  
Power  
1000  
Master Link  
Act  
AT-9724TS  
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23  
Stack ID  
SIO  
1
Console  
24  
21  
22  
23  
1000  
RPS  
Link  
Act  
2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24  
2
2
4
8
10  
14  
18  
20  
100Mbps  
100Mbps  
100Mbps  
10/100Mbps Hub  
10/100Mbps Hub  
10/100Mbps Hub  
10Mbps  
10Mbps  
10Mbps  
10Mbps  
100Mbps  
100Mbps  
100Mbps  
100Mbps  
PC  
PC  
PC  
PC  
PC  
PC  
PC  
PC  
PC  
Figure 6- 8. Example of PortTrunk Group  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port. Data transmitted to a specific host (destination address) will always be transmitted over the same  
port in a trunk group.This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the same order they were sent.  
Note:  
If any ports within the trunk group become disconnected, packets intended for the disconnected port will be load shared among the other  
uplinked ports of the link aggregation group.  
Link aggregation allows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link.This gives a bandwidth that is a multiple of a single link's bandwidth.  
Link aggregation is most commonly used to link a bandwidth intensive network device or devices, such as a server, to the backbone of a network.  
The Switch allows the creation of up to 32 link aggregation groups, each group consisting of 2 to 8 links (ports). All of the ports in the group must be members  
of the sameVLAN, and their STP status, static multicast, traffic control, traffic segmentation and 802.1p default priority configurations must be identical. Port  
locking, port mirroring and 802.1X must not be enabled on the trunk group. Further, the aggregated links must all be of the same speed and should be configured  
as full-duplex.  
The Master Port of the group is to be configured by the user, and all configuration options, including theVLAN configuration that can be applied to the Master  
Port, are applied to the entire link aggregation group.  
Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group, and a link failure within the group causes the network traffic to be directed to the  
remaining links in the group.  
The SpanningTree Protocol will treat a link aggregation group as a single link, on the switch level. On the port level, the STP will use the port parameters of the  
Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of the link aggregation group. If two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on  
the Switch, STP will block one entire group, in the same way STP will block a single port that has a redundant link.  
To configure port trunking, click on the Link Aggregation hyperlink in the Configuration folder to bring up the Port Link Aggregation Group table:  
Figure 6- 9. Current Link Aggregation Group Entries window  
To configure port trunk groups, click the Add button to add a new trunk group and use the Link Aggregation Settings menu (see example below) to set  
up trunk groups.To modify a port trunk group, click the hyperlinked group number corresponding to the entry you wish to alter.To delete a port trunk group,  
click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete heading in the Current Link Aggregation Group Entries table.  
Figure 6- 10. Link Aggregation Group Configuration window – Add  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 11. Link Aggregation Group Configuration window – Modify  
The user-changeable parameters are as follows:  
Parameter  
Description  
Group ID  
State  
Select an ID number for the group, between 1 and 32.  
Trunk groups can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled.This is used to turn a port trunking group on or off.  
This is useful for diagnostics, to quickly isolate a bandwidth intensive network device or to have an absolute  
backup aggregation group that is not under automatic control.  
Master Port  
Member Ports  
Flooding Port  
Active Port  
Type  
Choose the Master Port for the trunk group using the pull down menu.  
Choose the members of a trunked group. 2 to 8 ports can be assigned to an individual group.  
A trunking group must designate one port to allow transmission of broadcasts and unknown unicasts.  
Shows the port that is currently forwarding packets.  
This pull-down menu allows you to select between Static and LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). LACP  
allows for the automatic detection of links in a PortTrunking Group.  
After setting the previous parameters, click Apply to allow your changes to be implemented. Successfully created trunk groups will be show in the Current  
Link Aggregation Group Entries.  
6-8 LACP Port Setting  
The LACP Port Setting window is used in conjunction with the Link Aggregation window to create port trunking groups on the Switch. Using the  
following window, the user may set which ports will be active and passive in processing and sending LACP control frames.  
Figure 6- 12. LACP Port Setting and LACP Port Information window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The user may set the following parameters:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the switch in the switch stack to be configured by using the pull-down menu.  
A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port.  
From/To  
Mode  
Active – Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames.This allows LACP  
compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require.  
In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group, that is, to add or subtract ports from the  
group, at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active. Both devices must support  
LACP.  
Passive – LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot initially send LACP control frames. In order to allow  
the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically, one end of the connection must  
have "active" LACP ports (see above).  
After setting the previous parameters, click Apply to allow your changes to be implemented.The LACP Port Table shows which ports are active and/or  
passive.  
6-9 MAC Notification  
MAC Notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database.  
MAC Notification Global Settings  
To globally set MAC notification on the Switch, open the following screen by opening the MAC Notification folder and clicking the MAC Notification  
Global Settings link:  
Figure 6- 13. Current and New MAC Notification Global Settings window  
The following parameters may be modified:  
Parameter  
Description  
State  
Enable or disable MAC notification globally on the Switch.The default setting is Disabled.  
Interval (sec)  
The user may set the time, between 1 and 2,147,483,647 seconds, between MAC notifications.The default  
setting is 1 second.  
History size  
The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification. Up to 500 entries can be  
specified.The default setting is 1.  
Current MAC notification configurations can be viewed in the Current MAC Notification Global Settings window, as seen above.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAC Notification Port Settings  
To change MAC notification settings for a port or group of ports on the Switch, click Port Settings in the MAC Notification folder, which will display the  
following screen:  
Figure 6- 14. MAC Notification Port Settings and Port StateTable  
The following parameters may be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
Select a port or group of ports to enable for MAC notification using the pull down menus.  
Enable MAC Notification for the ports selected using the pull down menu.  
From…To  
State  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
6-10 IGMP  
Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast  
group.The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the  
multicast group for members that are no longer active.  
In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a subnetwork, one router is elected as the ‘querier’.This router then keeps track of the  
membership of the multicast groups that have active members.The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be  
forwarded to a given subnetwork or not.The router can check, using IGMP, to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnetwork. If  
there are no members on a subnetwork, packets will not be forwarded to that subnetwork.  
IGMP Versions 1 and 2  
Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or  
leaving a multicast group.  
IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:  
IGMP Message Format  
Octets  
0
8
16  
31  
Type  
Response Time  
Checksum  
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)  
Figure 6- 15. IGMP Message Format  
The IGMPType codes are shown below:  
Type  
Meaning  
0x11  
0x11  
0x16  
0x17  
0x12  
Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)  
Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is Present)  
Membership Report (version 2)  
Leave a Group (version 2)  
Membership Report (version 1)  
Table 6- 1. IGMPType Codes  
IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective subnetworks.The following outlines what is  
communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.  
A host sends an IGMP “report” to join a group.  
A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).  
A host will send a “leave” report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).  
Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members exist on their subnetworks. If  
there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members on the network.  
TheTime-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other subnetworks.  
IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast querier for each LAN, an explicit leave message, and query messages that  
are specific to a given group.  
The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:  
IGMP State  
Transitions  
Non-  
Member  
Leave Group  
Stop Timer  
Join Group  
Start Timer  
Count  
Becomes  
Zero  
Delaying  
Member  
Leave  
Group  
Query Received  
Start Timer  
Timer Expires  
Send Response  
Another Host  
Responds  
Stop Timer  
Member  
Figure 6- 16. IGMP StateTransitions  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
IGMP Snooping  
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping allows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent between network stations or  
devices and an IGMP host.When enabled for IGMP snooping, the Switch can open or close a port to a specific device based on IGMP messages passing through  
the Switch.  
In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch (see Advanced Settings).You may then fine-tune the settings for eachVLAN  
using the IGMP Snooping link in the Configuration folder. When enabled for IGMP snooping, the Switch can open or close a port to a specific Multicast  
group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa.The Switch monitors IGMP messages and discontinues forwarding  
multicast packets when there are no longer hosts requesting that they continue. Use the IGMP Snooping Group Entry Table to view IGMP Snooping  
status.To modify settings, click the Modify button for theVLAN Name entry you want to change.  
Use the Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries window to view IGMP Snooping settings.To modify settings, click the Modify button for theVLAN  
ID you want to change.  
Figure 6- 17. Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries  
Clicking the Modify button will open the IGMP Snooping Settings menu, shown below:  
Figure 6- 18. IGMP Snooping Settings window  
The following parameters may be viewed or modified:  
Parameter  
VLAN ID  
Description  
This is the VLAN ID that, along with the VLAN Name, identifies theVLAN the user wishes to modify the  
IGMP Snooping Settings for.  
VLAN Name  
This is the VLAN Name that, along with the VLAN ID, identifies theVLAN the user wishes to modify the  
IGMP Snooping Settings for.  
Query Interval  
Max Response Time  
The Query Interval field is used to set the time (in seconds) between transmitting IGMP queries. Entries  
between 1 and 65535 seconds are allowed. Default = 125.  
This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed before sending an IGMP response report.  
The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 1 and 25 (seconds). Default = 10.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
Robustness Value  
Adjust this variable according to expected packet loss. If packet loss on theVLAN is expected to be high, the  
Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet loss.This entry field allows an  
entry of 1 to 255. Default = 2.  
Last Member Query Interval  
Host Timeout  
This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, including those sent  
in response to leave group messages. Default = 1.  
This is the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed for a host to continue membership in a multicast  
group without the Switch receiving a host membership report. Default = 260.  
Router Timeout  
Leave Timer  
This is the maximum amount of time in seconds a route is kept in the forwarding table without receiving a  
membership report. Default = 260.  
This specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds between the Switch receiving a leave group message  
from a host, and the Switch issuing a group membership query. If no response to the membership query is  
received before the Leave Timer expires, the (multicast) forwarding entry for that host is deleted.  
Querier State  
Choose Enabled to enable transmitting IGMP Query packets or Disabled to disable.The default is Disabled.  
Querier Router Behavior  
This read-only field describes the behavior of the router for sending query packets. Querier will denote that the  
router is sending out IGMP query packets. Non-Querier will denote that the router is not sending out IGMP  
query packets.This field will only read Querier when the Querier State and the State fields have been  
Enabled.  
State  
Select Enabled to implement IGMP Snooping.This field is Disabled by default.  
Click Apply to implement the new settings. Click the Show All IGMP Group Entries link to return to the Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries  
window.  
Static Router Ports  
A static router port is a port that has a multicast router attached to it. Generally, this router would have a connection to aWAN or to the Internet. Establishing a  
router port will allow multicast packets coming from the router to be propagated through the network, as well as allowing multicast messages (IGMP) coming  
from the network to be propagated to the router.  
A router port has the following behavior:  
•
•
•
All IGMP Report packets will be forwarded to the router port.  
IGMP queries (from the router port) will be flooded to all ports.  
All UDP multicast packets will be forwarded to the router port. Because routers do not send IGMP reports or implement IGMP snooping, a multicast  
router connected to the router port of a Layer 3 switch would not be able to receive UDP data streams unless the UDP multicast packets were all  
forwarded to the router port.  
A router port will be dynamically configured when IGMP query packets, RIPv2 multicast, DVMRP multicast or PIM-DM multicast packets are detected flowing  
into a port.  
Open the IGMP folder and the click on the Static Router Ports Entry link to open the Current Static Router Ports Entries page, as shown  
below.  
Figure 6- 19. Current Static Router Ports Entries window  
The Current Static Router Ports Entries page (shown above) displays all of the current entries to the Switch's static router port table.To modify an  
entry, click the Modify button.This will open the Static Router Ports Settings page, as shown below.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 20. Static Router Ports Settings window  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
VID (VLAN ID)  
This is theVLAN ID that, along with theVLAN Name, identifies theVLAN where the multicast router is  
attached.  
VLAN Name  
Unit  
This is the name of theVLAN where the multicast router is attached.  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
These are the ports on the Switch that will have a multicast router attached to them.  
Member Ports  
Click Apply to implement the new settings, click the Show All Static Router Port Entries link to return to the Current Static Router Port Entries  
window.  
6.11 Spanning Tree  
This Switch supports three versions of the SpanningTree Protocol; 802.1d STP, 802.1w Rapid STP and 802.1s MSTP. 802.1d STP will be familiar to most  
networking professionals. However, since 802.1w RSTP and 802.1s MSTP has been recently introduced to AlliedTelesyn managed Ethernet switches, a brief  
introduction to the technology is provided below followed by a description of how to set up 802.1d STP, 802.1w RSTP and 802.1s MSTP.  
802.1s MSTP  
Multiple SpanningTree Protocol, or MSTP, is a standard defined by the IEEE community that allows multipleVLANs to be mapped to a single spanning tree  
instance, which will provide multiple pathways across the network.Therefore, these MSTP configurations will balance the traffic load, preventing wide scale  
disruptions when a single spanning tree instance fails.This will allow for faster convergences of new topologies for the failed instance. Frames designated for these  
VLANs will be processed quickly and completely throughout interconnected bridges utilizing either of the three spanning tree protocols (STP, RSTP or MSTP).  
This protocol will also tag BDPU packets so receiving devices can distinguish spanning tree instances, spanning tree regions and theVLANs associated with them.  
These instances will be classified by an MSTI ID. MSTP will connect multiple spanning trees with a Common and Internal SpanningTree (CIST).The CIST will  
automatically determine each MSTP region, its maximum possible extent and will appear as one virtual bridge that runs a single spanning tree. Consequentially,  
frames assigned to differentVLANs will follow different data routes within administratively established regions on the network, continuing to allow simple and full  
processing of frames, regardless of administrative errors in definingVLANs and their respective spanning trees.  
Each switch utilizing the MSTP on a network will have a single MSTP configuration that will have the following three attributes:  
1.  
A configuration name defined by an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters (defined in the MST Configuration Table window in the  
Configuration Name field).  
2.  
3.  
A configuration revision number (named here as a Revision Level and found in the MST Configuration Table window) and;  
A 4096 element table (defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Table window) which will associate each of the possible 4096  
VLANs supported by the Switch for a given instance.  
To utilize the MSTP function on the Switch, three steps need to be taken:  
1.  
2.  
The Switch must be set to the MSTP setting (found in the STP Bridge Global Settings window in the STP Version field).  
The correct spanning tree priority for the MSTP instance must be entered (defined here as a Priority in the STP Instance Settings window  
when configuring an MSTI ID settings).  
3.  
VLANs that will be shared must be added to the MSTP Instance ID (defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Table window  
when configuring an MSTI ID settings).  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree  
The Switch implements three versions of the SpanningTree Protocol, the Multiple SpanningTree Protocol (MSTP) as defined by the IEEE 802.1s, the Rapid  
SpanningTree Protocol (RSTP) as defined by the IEEE 802.1w specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802.1d STP. RSTP can operate with legacy  
equipment implementing IEEE 802.1d, however the advantages of using RSTP will be lost.  
The IEEE 802.1w Rapid SpanningTree Protocol (RSTP) evolved from the 802.1d STP standard. RSTP was developed in order to overcome some limitations of  
STP that impede the function of some recent switching innovations, in particular, certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches.The  
basic function and much of the terminology is the same as STP. Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for RSTP. This section introduces some new  
SpanningTree concepts and illustrates the main differences between the two protocols.  
Port Transition States  
An essential difference between the three protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way this transition relates to the role of the  
port (forwarding or not forwarding) in the topology. MSTP and RSTP combine the transition states disabled, blocking and listening used in 802.1d and creates a  
single state Discarding. In either case, ports do not forward packets. In the STP port transition states disabled, blocking or listening or in the RSTP/MSTP port  
state discarding, there is no functional difference, the port is not active in the network topology.Table 6-1 below compares how the three protocols differ  
regarding the port state transition.  
All three protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way. Every segment will have a single path to the root bridge.All bridges listen for BPDU packets.  
However, BPDU packets are sent more frequently – with every Hello packet. BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received.Therefore, each link  
between bridges is sensitive to the status of the link. Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed links, and thus faster topology adjustment.A  
draw-back of 802.1d is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges.  
802.1d MSTP  
802.1w RSTP  
802.1d STP  
Forwarding  
Learning  
Discarding  
Discarding  
Discarding  
Learning  
Discarding  
Discarding  
Discarding  
Learning  
Disabled  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
Forwarding  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Forwarding  
Forwarding  
Table 6- 2. Comparing Port States  
RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state – it no longer relies on timer configurations – RSTP compliant bridges are sensitive to feedback  
from other RSTP compliant bridge links. Ports do not need to wait for the topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state. In order to allow this  
rapid transition, the protocol introduces two new variables: the edge port and the point-to-point (P2P) port.  
Edge Port  
The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop cannot be created. An example would be a port  
connected directly to a single workstation. Ports that are designated as edge ports transition to a forwarding state immediately without going through the  
listening and learning states. An edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet, immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port.  
P2P Port  
A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition. P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges. Under RSTP/MSTP, all ports operating in full-duplex mode are  
considered to be P2P ports, unless manually overridden through configuration.  
802.1d / 802.1w / 802.1s Compatibility  
MSTP or RSTP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to 802.1d format when necessary. However, any  
segment using 802.1d STP will not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid topology change detection of MSTP or RSTP. The protocol also provides for a  
variable used for migration in the event that legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP or MSTP.  
The SpanningTree Protocol (STP) operates on two levels:  
1.  
2.  
On the switch level, the settings are globally implemented.  
On the port level, the settings are implemented on a per user-defined group of ports basis.  
STP Bridge Global Settings  
To open the following window, open the Spanning Tree folder in the Configuration menu and click the STP Bridge Global Settings link.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 21. STP Bridge Global Settings – STP compatible  
Figure 6- 22. STP Bridge Global Settings – RSTP (default)  
Figure 6- 23. STP Bridge Global Settings  
The following parameters can be set:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Parameter  
Description  
STP Status  
Use the pull-down menu to enable or disable STP globally on the Switch.The default is Disabled.  
STP Version  
Use the pull-down menu to choose the desired version of STP to be implemented on the Switch.There are  
three choices:  
STP – Select this parameter to set the SpanningTree Protocol (STP) globally on the switch.  
RSTP – Select this parameter to set the Rapid SpanningTree Protocol (RSTP) globally on the Switch.  
MSTP – Select this parameter to set the Multiple SpanningTree Protocol (MSTP) globally on the Switch.  
Hello Time: (1-10 sec)  
Max Age: (6 - 40 sec)  
The Hello Time can be set from 1 to 10 seconds.This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU  
packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge.This field will only  
appear here when STP or RSTP is selected for the STPVersion. For MSTP, the HelloTime must be set on a port  
per port basis. See the MST Port Settings section for further details.  
The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate through redundant  
paths in the network, preventing the effective propagation of the new information. Set by the Root Bridge, this  
value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other  
devices on the bridged LAN. If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge,  
the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If  
it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.The user may  
choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds.The default value is 20.  
Forward Delay: (4 – 30 sec)  
The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds.Any port on the Switch spends this time in the listening  
state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.  
Max Hops (1-20)  
Used to set the number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU (bridge protocol  
data unit) packet sent by the Switch will be discarded. Each switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count  
by one until the value reaches zero.The Switch will then discard the BDPU packet and the information held for  
the port will age out.The user may set a hop count from 1 to 20.The default is 20.  
TX Hold Count (1-10)  
Forwarding BPDU  
Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval.The count can be specified from 1  
to 10.The default is 3.  
This field can be Enabled or Disabled.When Enabled, it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other  
network devices.The default is Enabled.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Note:  
The HelloTime cannot be longer than the Max.Age. Otherwise, a configuration error will occur. Observe the following formulas when  
setting the above parameters:  
Max.Age ≤ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)  
Max.Age ≤ 2 x (HelloTime + 1 second)  
MST Configuration Table  
The following screens in the MST Configuration Table window allow the user to configure a MSTI instance on the Switch.These settings will uniquely  
identify a multiple spanning tree instance set on the Switch.The Switch initially possesses one CIST or Common Internal SpanningTree of which the user may  
modify the parameters for but cannot change the MSTI ID for, and cannot be deleted.To view the Current MST Configuration Identification window,  
click Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Configuration Table:  
Figure 6- 24. Current MST Configuration Identification window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The window above contains the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
Configuration Name  
A previously configured name set on the Switch to uniquely identify the MSTI (Multiple SpanningTree Instance).  
If a configuration name is not set, this field will show the MAC address to the device running MSTP.  
Revision Level  
MSTI ID  
This value, along with the Configuration Name will identify the MSTP region configured on the Switch.  
This field shows the MSTI IDs currently set on the Switch.This field will always have the CIST MSTI, which  
may be configured but not deleted. Clicking the hyperlinked name will open a new window for configuring  
parameters associated with that particular MSTI.  
VID List  
This field displays theVLAN IDs associated with the specific MSTI.  
To delete a previously set MSTI Instance ID, click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete heading in the Current MST Configuration Identification  
window. Clicking the Add button will reveal the following window to configure:  
Figure 6- 25. Instance ID Settings window – Add  
The user may configure the following parameters to create a MSTI in the Switch.  
Parameter  
Description  
MSTI ID  
Type  
Enter a number between 1 and 15 to set a new MSTI on the Switch.  
Create is selected to create a new MSTI. No other choices are available for this field when creating a new  
MSTI.  
VID List (1-4094)  
This field is used to specify theVID range from configuredVLANs set on the Switch. SupportedVIDs on the  
Switch range from ID number 1 to 4094.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
To configure the settings for the CIST, click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID number in the Current MST Configuration Identification window, which will  
reveal the following window to configure:  
Figure 6- 26. Instance ID Settings window – CIST modify  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The user may configure the following parameters to configure the CIST on the Switch.  
Parameter  
Description  
MSTI ID  
Type  
The MSTI ID of the CIST is 0 and cannot be altered.  
The type of configuration about to be processed.This window is used to add or deleteVIDs to the configured  
MSTI or internal CIST. All other parameters are permanently set and therefore unchangeable.  
VID List (1-4094)  
This field is used to specify theVID range from configuredVLANs set on the Switch. SupportedVIDs on the  
Switch range from ID number 1 to 4094.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
To configure the parameters for a previously set MSTI, click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID number, which will reveal the following screen for configuration.  
Figure 6- 27. Instance ID Settings window – modify  
The user may configure the following parameters for a MSTI on the Switch.  
Parameter  
Description  
MSTI ID  
Type  
Displays the MSTI ID previously set by the user.  
This field allows the user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings.The user has 4 choices.  
AddVID – Select this parameter to addVIDs to the MSTI ID, in conjunction with theVID List parameter.  
RemoveVID – Select this parameter to removeVIDs from the MSTI ID, in conjunction with theVID List  
parameter.  
VID List (1-4094)  
This field is used to specify theVID range from configuredVLANs set on the Switch that the user wishes to add  
to this MSTI ID. SupportedVIDs on the Switch range from ID number 1 to 4094.This parameter can only be  
utilized if the Type chosen is Add or Remove.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
MSTI Port Information  
This window displays the current MSTI configuration settings and can be used to update the port configuration for an MSTI ID. If a loop occurs, the MSTP  
function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state. Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding  
first. In instances where the priority value is identical, the MSTP function will implement the lowest port number into the forwarding state and other interfaces  
will be blocked. Remember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets.  
To view the following window, click Configuration > Spanning Tree > MST Port Information:  
Figure 6- 28. MSTP Port Information window  
To view the MSTI settings for a particular port, select the Port number and the Unit ID number of the switch in the switch stack, located in the top left hand  
corner of the screen and click Apply. To modify the settings for a particular MSTI Instance, click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID, which will reveal the following  
window.  
Figure 6- 29. MSTI Settings window  
Parameter  
Instance ID  
Description  
Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being configured.An entry of 0 in this field denotes the CIST (default  
MSTI).  
Internal cost (0=Auto)  
This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports when an interface  
is selected within a STP instance.The default setting is 0 (auto).There are two options:  
0 (auto) – Selecting this parameter for the internal Cost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for  
an interface.The default value is derived from the media speed of the interface.  
value 1-2000000 – Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 1-2000000 will set the quickest route  
when a loop occurs. A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission.  
Priority  
Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface. A higher priority will designate the  
interface to forward packets first. A lower number denotes a higher priority.This entry must be divisible by 16.  
The default priority setting is 128.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
STP Instance Settings  
The following window displays MSTIs currently set on the Switch.To view the following table, click Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Instance  
Settings:  
Figure 6- 30. STP Instance Settings  
The following information is displayed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Instance Type  
Displays the instance type(s) currently configured on the Switch. Each instance type is classified by a MSTI ID.  
CIST refers to the default MSTI configuration set on the Switch.  
Instance Status  
Instance Priority  
Priority  
Displays the current status of the corresponding MSTI ID.  
Displays the priority of the corresponding MSTI ID.The lowest priority will be the root bridge.  
Click the Modify button to change the priority of the MSTI.This will open the Instance ID Settings window to  
configure.TheType field in this window will be permanently set to Set Priority Only. Enter the new priority in  
the Priority field and click Apply to implement the new priority setting.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Clicking the hyperlinked name will allow the user to view the current parameters set for the MSTI Instance.  
Figure 6- 31. STP Instance Operational Status – CIST  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 32. STP Instance Operational Status – Previously Configured MSTI  
The following parameters may be viewed in the STP Instance Operational Status windows:  
Parameter  
Description  
Designated Root Bridge  
External Root Cost  
This field will show the priority and MAC address of the Root Bridge.  
This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list. Port cost  
can be set automatically or as a metric value.The default value is 0 (auto).  
0 (auto) – Setting 0 for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified  
port(s) in the list for optimal efficiency. Default port cost: 100Mbps port = 200000. Gigabit port = 20000.  
value 1-200000000 – Define a value between 1 and 200000000 to determine the external cost.The lower the  
number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets.  
Regional Root Bridge  
Internal Root Cost  
This field will show the priority and MAC address of the Regional (Internal) Root Bridge.This MAC address  
should be the MAC address of the Switch.  
This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports when an interface  
is selected within a STP instance.The default setting is 0 (auto).There are two options:  
0 (auto) – Selecting this parameter for the internalCost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for an  
interface.The default value is derived from the media speed of the interface.  
value 1-2000000 – Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 1-2000000 will set the quickest route  
when a loop occurs.A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission.  
Designated Bridge  
This field will show the priority and MAC address of the Designated Bridge.The information shown in this table  
comes from a BPDU packet originating from this bridge.  
Root Port  
Max Age  
This is the port on the Switch that is physically connected to the Root Bridge.  
The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate through redundant  
paths in the network, preventing the effective propagation of the new information. Set by the Root Bridge, this  
value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other  
devices on the bridged LAN. If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge,  
the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If  
it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.The user may  
choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds.The default value is 20.  
Forward Delay  
The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds.Any port on the Switch spends this time in the listening  
state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.  
Last Topology Change  
This field shows the time, in seconds, since the last spanning tree topology change.  
Topology Changes Count  
This field displays the number of times that the spanning tree topology has changed since the original initial  
boot up of the Switch.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
STP Port Settings  
STP can be set up on a port per port basis.To view the following window click Configuration > Spanning Tree > STP Port Settings:  
Figure 6- 33. STP Port Settings and MSTP Port InformationTable  
In addition to setting SpanningTree parameters for use on the switch level, the Switch allows for the configuration of groups of ports, each port-group of which  
will have its own spanning tree, and will require some of its own configuration settings. An STP Group will use the switch-level parameters entered above, with  
the addition of Port Priority and Port Cost.  
An STP Group spanning tree works in the same way as the switch-level spanning tree, but the root bridge concept is replaced with a root port concept. A root  
port is a port of the group that is elected based on port priority and port cost, to be the connection to the network for the group. Redundant links will be  
blocked, just as redundant links are blocked on the switch level.  
The STP on the switch level blocks redundant links between switches (and similar network devices).The port level STP will block redundant links within an STP  
Group.  
It is advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to aVLAN group of ports.  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port.  
From/To  
External Cost  
This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list. Port cost  
can be set automatically or as a metric value.The default value is 0 (auto).  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
0 (auto) – Setting 0 for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified  
port(s) in the list for optimal efficiency. Default port cost: 100Mbps port = 200000. Gigabit port = 20000.  
value 1-200000000 – Define a value between 1 and 200000000 to determine the external cost.The lower the  
number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets.  
Hello Time  
Migration  
The time interval between the transmission of configuration messages by the designated port, to other devices  
on the bridged LAN, thus stating that the Switch is still functioning.The user may choose a time between 1 and  
10 seconds.The default is 2 seconds.This field is only operable when the Switch is enabled for MSTP.  
Setting this parameter as "yes" will set the ports to send out BDPU packets to other bridges, requesting  
information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP, the port will be capable to migrate from  
802.1d STP to 802.1w RSTP. If the Switch is configured for MSTP, the port is capable of migrating from 802.1d  
STP to 802.1s MSTP. RSTP and MSTP can coexist with standard STP, however the benefits of RSTP and MSTP  
are not realized on a port where an 802.1d network connects to an 802.1w or 802.1s enabled network.  
Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being  
upgraded to 802.1w RSTP or 802.1s MSTP on all or some portion of the segment.  
Edge  
P2P  
Choosing the true parameter designates the port as an edge port. Edge ports cannot create loops, however an  
edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop. An edge port normally  
should not receive BPDU packets. If a BPDU packet is received, it automatically loses edge port status.  
Choosing the false parameter indicates that the port does not have edge port status.  
Choosing the True parameter indicates a point-to-point (P2P) shared link. P2P ports are similar to edge ports,  
however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full-duplex. Like edge ports, P2P ports transition  
to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP. A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have  
p2p status.Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were  
true. If the port cannot maintain this status, (for example if the port is forced to half-duplex operation) the p2p  
status changes to operate as if the p2p value were False.The default setting for this parameter is True.  
State  
This drop-down menu allows you to enable or disable STP for the selected group of ports.The default is  
Enabled.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
6-13 Forwarding & Filtering  
Unicast Forwarding  
Open the Forwarding & Filtering folder in the Configuration menu and click on the Unicast Forwarding link.This will open the Setup Static  
Unicast Forwarding Table, as shown below:  
Figure 6- 34. Setup Static Unicast ForwardingTable and Static Unicast ForwardingTable window  
To add or edit an entry, define the following parameters and then click Add/Modify:  
Parameter  
Description  
VLAN ID (VID)  
MAC Address  
Unit  
TheVLAN ID number of theVLAN on which the above Unicast MAC address resides.  
The MAC address to which packets will be statically forwarded.This must be a unicast MAC address.  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
Port  
Allows the selection of the port number on which the MAC address entered above resides.  
Click Apply to implement the changes made.To delete an entry in the Static Unicast Forwarding Table, click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete  
heading.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Static Multicast Forwarding  
The following figure and table describe how to set up Multicast Forwarding on the Switch. Open the Forwarding Filtering folder and click on the  
Multicast Forwarding link to see the entry screen below:  
Figure 6- 35. Static Multicast Forwarding Settings and Current Multicast Forwarding Entries  
The Static Multicast Forwarding Settings page displays all of the entries made into the Switch's static multicast forwarding table. Click the Add button  
to open the Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table, as shown below:  
Figure 6- 36. Setup Static Multicast ForwardingTable  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
TheVLAN ID of theVLAN the corresponding MAC address belongs to.  
VID  
Multicast MAC Address  
Port  
The MAC address of the static source of multicast packets.This must be a multicast MAC address.  
Allows the selection of ports that will be members of the static multicast group.The options are:  
None – No restrictions on the port dynamically joining the multicast group.When None is chosen, the port will  
not be a member of the Static Multicast Group.  
Egress –The port is a static member of the multicast group.  
Click Apply to implement the changes made.To delete an entry in the Static Multicast Forwarding Table, click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete  
heading. Click the Show All Multicast Forwarding Entries link to return to the Static Multicast Forwarding Settings window.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-14 VLANs  
Understanding IEEE 802.1p Priority  
Priority tagging is a function defined by the IEEE 802.1p standard designed to provide a means of managing traffic on a network where many different types of  
data may be transmitted simultaneously. It is intended to alleviate problems associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks.The quality  
of applications that are dependent on such time critical data, such as video conferencing, can be severely and adversely affected by even very small delays in  
transmission.  
Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802.1p standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of data packets.These devices can also  
assign a priority label or tag to packets. Compliant devices can also strip priority tags from packets.This priority tag determines the packet's degree of  
expeditiousness and determines the queue to which it will be assigned.  
Priority tags are given values from 0 to 7 with 0 being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the highest.The highest priority tag 7 is generally  
only used for data associated with video or audio applications, which are sensitive to even slight delays, or for data from specified end users whose data  
transmissions warrant special consideration.  
The Switch allows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network. Using queues to manage priority tagged data allows you  
to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network.There may be circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently  
tagged packets into the same queue.  
Generally, however, it is recommended that the highest priority queue, Queue 1, be reserved for data packets with a priority value of 7. Packets that have not  
been given any priority value are placed in Queue 0 and thus given the lowest priority for delivery.  
A weighted round robin system is employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues are emptied of packets.The ratio used for clearing the  
queues is 4:1.This means that the highest priority queue, Queue 1, will clear 4 packets for every 1 packet cleared from Queue 0.  
Remember, the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports, and all devices connected to the Switch will be affected.This priority queuing system will  
be especially beneficial if your network employs switches with the capability of assigning priority tags.  
VLAN Description  
AVirtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout.VLANs can be used to  
combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN. VLANs also logically segment the network into different  
broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within theVLAN. Typically, aVLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not  
necessarily.  
VLANs can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.  
AVLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the  
sameVLAN, regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, aVLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are  
forwarded to only members of theVLAN on which the broadcast was initiated.  
Notes About VLANs on the AT-9724TS  
No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodesVLAN membership, packets cannot crossVLANs without a network device  
performing a routing function between theVLANs.  
The AT-9724TS supports IEEE 802.1QVLANs and Port-BasedVLANs. The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802.1Q tag from packet headers to  
maintain compatibility with devices that are tag-unaware.The Switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1QVLAN named "default."  
The "default"VLAN has aVID = 1.  
The member ports of Port-basedVLANs may overlap, if desired.  
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs  
Some relevant terms:  
Tagging –The act of putting 802.1QVLAN information into the header of a packet.  
Untagging –The act of stripping 802.1QVLAN information out of the packet header.  
Ingress port – A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch andVLAN decisions must be made.  
Egress port – A port on a switch where packets are flowing out of the Switch, either to another switch or to an end station, and tagging decisions must be  
made.  
IEEE 802.1Q (tagged)VLANs are implemented on the Switch. 802.1QVLANs require tagging, which enables them to span the entire network (assuming all  
switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).  
VLANs allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering aVLAN will only be forwarded to the stations  
(over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of thatVLAN, and this includes broadcast, multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.  
VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1QVLANs will only deliver packets between stations that are members of theVLAN.  
Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging.The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1QVLANs allowsVLANs to work with legacy switches that don't  
recognizeVLAN tags in packet headers.The tagging feature allowsVLANs to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and  
allows SpanningTree to be enabled on all ports and work normally.  
The IEEE 802.1Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to theVLAN the receiving port is a member of.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The main characteristics of IEEE 802.1Q are as follows:  
•
•
•
•
•
Assigns packets toVLANs by filtering.  
Assumes the presence of a single global spanning tree.  
Uses an explicit tagging scheme with one-level tagging.  
802.1QVLAN Packet Forwarding  
Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the following three types of rules:  
•
•
•
Ingress rules – rules relevant to the classification of received frames belonging to aVLAN.  
Forwarding rules between ports – decides whether to filter or forward the packet.  
Egress rules – determines if the packet must be sent tagged or untagged.  
Packet  
Packet  
Receive  
Transmit  
Ingress  
Filtering  
Ingress  
Rules  
Egress  
Rules  
Forwarding  
Process  
Filtering  
Database  
PVID to VID  
VLAN Table  
Port  
State  
Tagged or Untagged  
Figure 6- 37. IEEE 802.1Q Packet Forwarding  
802.1Q VLAN Tags  
The figure below shows the 802.1QVLAN tag.There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address.Their presence is indicated by a value of  
0x8100 in the EtherType field.When a packet's EtherType field is equal to 0x8100, the packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag.The tag is contained in the  
following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority, 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulatingToken Ring packets so they can be  
carried across Ethernet backbones), and 12 bits ofVLAN ID (VID).The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802.1p.TheVID is theVLAN identifier and is used by  
the 802.1Q standard. Because theVID is 12 bits long, 4094 uniqueVLANs can be identified.  
The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets.All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IEEE 802.1Q Tag  
Octets  
0
4
1
2
3
Destination Address (6 Octets)  
Source Address (6 Octets)  
EtherType = 0x8100  
MAC Length/Type  
Tag Control Information  
Beginning of Data  
Cyclic Redundancy Check (4 Octets)  
User Priority  
3 bits  
CFI  
VLAN ID (VID)  
1 bit  
12 bits  
Figure 6- 38. IEEE 802.1QTag  
The EtherType andVLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original EtherType/Length or Logical Link Control. Because the packet is  
now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be recalculated.  
Adding an IEEE 802.1 Tag  
Dest. Src.  
Dest. Src.  
Length/EType  
EType  
Data  
Old CRC  
Original Ethernet Packet  
Tag  
Data  
New CRC New Tagged Packet  
Priority  
VLAN ID  
Figure 6- 39.Adding an IEEE 802.1QTag  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
Port VLAN ID  
Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1QVID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant network device to another with theVLAN  
information intact.This allows 802.1QVLANs to span network devices (and indeed, the entire network, if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant).  
Unfortunately, not all network devices are 802.1Q compliant.These devices are referred to as tag-unaware. 802.1Q devices are referred to as tag-aware.  
Prior to the adoption of 802.1QVLANs, port-based and MAC-basedVLANs were in common use.TheseVLANs relied upon a PortVLAN ID (PVID) to forward  
packets.A packet received on a given port would be assigned that port's PVID and then be forwarded to the port that corresponded to the packet's destination  
address (found in the Switch's forwarding table). If the PVID of the port that received the packet is different from the PVID of the port that is to transmit the  
packet, the Switch will drop the packet.  
Within the Switch, different PVIDs mean differentVLANs (remember that twoVLANs cannot communicate without an external router). So,VLAN identification  
based upon the PVIDs cannot createVLANs that extend outside a given switch (or switch stack).  
Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the Switch. If noVLANs are defined on the Switch, all ports are  
then assigned to a defaultVLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions  
are based upon this PVID, in so far asVLANs are concerned.Tagged packets are forwarded according to theVID contained within the tag.Tagged packets are also  
assigned a PVID, but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions, theVID is.  
Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVIDs within the Switch toVIDs on the network.The Switch will compare theVID of a packet to be transmitted  
to theVID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the twoVIDs are different, the Switch will drop the packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for  
untagged packets and theVID for tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware network devices can coexist on the same network.  
A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as manyVIDs as the Switch has memory in itsVLAN table to store them.  
Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware device before packets are transmitted – should  
the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting  
port is connected to a tag-aware device, the packet should be tagged.  
Tagging and Untagging  
Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging.  
Ports with tagging enabled will put theVID number, priority and otherVLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into and out of it. If a packet has  
previously been tagged, the port will not alter the packet, thus keeping theVLAN information intact.TheVLAN information in the tag can then be used by other  
802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet-forwarding decisions.  
Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into and out of those ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1QVLAN tag, the  
port will not alter the packet.Thus, all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802.1QVLAN information. (Remember that the PVID  
is only used internally within the Switch). Untagging is used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-compliant network device.  
Ingress Filtering  
A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch andVLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an ingress port. If ingress filtering is enabled for  
a port, the Switch will examine theVLAN information in the packet header (if present) and decide whether or not to forward the packet.  
If the packet is tagged withVLAN information, the ingress port will first determine if the ingress port itself is a member of the taggedVLAN. If it is not, the packet  
will be dropped. If the ingress port is a member of the 802.1QVLAN, the Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802.1QVLAN. If it is  
not, the packet is dropped. If the destination port is a member of the 802.1QVLAN, the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to its attached  
network segment.  
If the packet is not tagged withVLAN information, the ingress port will tag the packet with its own PVID as aVID (if the port is a tagging port).The switch then  
determines if the destination port is a member of the sameVLAN (has the sameVID) as the ingress port. If it does not, the packet is dropped. If it has the same  
VID, the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment.  
This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping packets that are not on the sameVLAN as the  
ingress port at the point of reception.This eliminates the subsequent processing of packets that will just be dropped by the destination port.  
Default VLANs  
The Switch initially configures oneVLAN,VID = 1, called "default."The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the "default." As newVLANs are  
configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from the "default."  
Packets cannot crossVLANs. If a member of oneVLAN wants to connect to anotherVLAN, the link must be through an external router.  
Note:  
If noVLANs are configured on the Switch, then all packets will be forwarded to any destination port. Packets with unknown source  
addresses will be flooded to all ports. Broadcast and multicast packets will also be flooded to all ports.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
An example is presented below:  
VLAN Name  
VID  
Switch Ports  
System (default)  
Engineering  
Marketing  
Finance  
1
2
3
4
5
5, 6, 7, 8, 21, 22, 23, 24  
9, 10, 11, 12  
13, 14, 15, 16  
17, 18, 19, 20  
1, 2, 3, 4  
Sales  
Table 6- 3.VLAN Example – Assigned Ports  
Port-based VLANs  
Port-basedVLANs limit traffic that flows into and out of switch ports.Thus, all devices connected to a port are members of theVLAN(s) the port belongs to,  
whether there is a single computer directly connected to a switch, or an entire department.  
On port-basedVLANs, NICs do not need to be able to identify 802.1Q tags in packet headers. NICs send and receive normal Ethernet packets. If the packet's  
destination lies on the same segment, communications take place using normal Ethernet protocols. Even though this is always the case, when the destination for a  
packet lies on another switch port,VLAN considerations come into play to decide if the packet gets dropped by the Switch or delivered.  
VLAN Segmentation  
Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port 1 that is a member ofVLAN 2. If the destination lies on another port (found through a  
normal forwarding table lookup), the Switch then looks to see if the other port (Port 10) is a member ofVLAN 2 (and can therefore receiveVLAN 2 packets). If  
Port 10 is not a member ofVLAN 2, then the packet will be dropped by the Switch and will not reach its destination. If Port 10 is a member ofVLAN 2, the  
packet will go through.This selective forwarding feature based onVLAN criteria is howVLANs segment networks.The key point being that Port 1 will only  
transmit onVLAN 2.  
Network resources such as printers and servers however, can be shared acrossVLANs.This is achieved by setting up overlappingVLANs.That is ports can belong  
to more than oneVLAN group. For example, settingVLAN 1 members to ports 1, 2, 3, and 4 andVLAN 2 members to ports 1, 5, 6, and 7. Port 1 belongs to two  
VLAN groups. Ports 8, 9, and 10 are not configured to anyVLAN group.This means ports 8, 9, and 10 are in the sameVLAN group.  
VLAN and Trunk Groups  
The members of a trunk group have the sameVLAN setting.AnyVLAN setting on the members of a trunk group will apply to the other member ports.  
Note:  
In order to useVLAN segmentation in conjunction with port trunk groups, you can first set the port trunk group(s), and then you may  
configureVLAN settings. If you wish to change the port trunk grouping withVLANs already in place, you will not need to reconfigure theVLAN  
settings after changing the port trunk group settings.VLAN settings will automatically change in conjunction with the change of the port trunk group  
settings.  
Protocol VLANs  
The AT-9724TS incorporates the idea of protocol-basedVLANs.This standard, defined by the IEEE 802.1v standard maps packets to protocol-definedVLANs by  
examining the type octet within the packet header to discover the type of protocol associated with it.After assessing the protocol, the Switch will forward the  
packets to all ports within the protocol-assignedVLAN.This feature will benefit the administrator by better balancing load sharing and enhancing traffic  
classification.The Switch supports fifteen (15) pre-defined protocols for configuration.The user may also choose a protocol that is not one of the fifteen defined  
protocols by properly configuring the userDefined protocolVLAN.The supported protocols for the protocolVLAN function on this switch include IP, IPX, DEC,  
DEC LAT, SNAP, NetBIOS,AppleTalk, XNS, SNA, IPv6, RARP andVINES.  
The following is a list of type headers for each protocol listed forVLAN configuration.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protocol  
Type Header in Hexadecimal Form  
IP over Ethernet  
IPX 802.3  
IPX 802.2  
IPX SNAP  
IPX over Ethernet2  
DecLAT  
0x0800  
0xFFFF  
0xE0E0  
0x8137  
0x8137  
0x6000  
0x6009  
0x0404  
0xF0F0  
0x0600  
0x0BAD  
0x86DD  
0x809B  
0x8035  
DecOther  
SNA 802.2  
NetBios  
XNS  
VINES  
IPv6  
AppleTalk  
RARP  
Table 6- 4. ProtocolVLAN and the corresponding type header  
In configuring the user-defined protocol, the administrator must make sure that the pre-defined user type header does not match any other type header.A match  
may cause discrepancies within the local network and failure to define theVLAN to forward packets to.  
Static VLAN Entry  
In the Configuration folder, open the VLAN folder and click the Static VLAN Entry link to open the following window:  
Figure 6- 40. Current 802.1Q StaticVLANs Entries window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The 802.1Q Static VLANs menu lists all previously configuredVLANs by VLAN ID and VLAN Name.To delete an existing 802.1QVLAN, click the  
corresponding button under the Delete heading.  
To create a new 802.1QVLAN, click the Add button in the 802.1Q Static VLANs menu. A new menu will appear, as shown below, to configure the port  
settings and to assign a unique name and number to the newVLAN. See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new menu.  
Figure 6- 41. 802.1Q StaticVLANs – Add  
To return to the Current 802.1Q Static VLANs Entries window, click the Show All StaticVLAN Entries link.To change an existing 802.1QVLAN entry,  
click the Modify button of the corresponding entry you wish to modify.A new menu will appear to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and  
number to the newVLAN. See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new menu.  
Figure 6- 42. 802.1Q StaticVLANs – Modify  
The following fields can then be set in either the Add or Modify 802.1Q StaticVLANs menus:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
VID (VLAN ID)  
Allows the entry of aVLAN ID in the Add dialog box, or displays theVLAN ID of an existingVLAN in the  
Modify dialog box.VLANs can be identified by either theVID or theVLAN name.  
VLAN Name  
Allows the entry of a name for the newVLAN in the Add dialog box, or for editing theVLAN name in the  
Modify dialog box.  
Advertisement  
Enabling this function will allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources, notifying that they  
may join the existingVLAN.  
Type  
Displays the type of protocol associated with thisVLAN.  
Protocol ID  
The following parameters allow for the creation of protocol-basedVLANs.The Switch supports 15 pre-  
configured protocol-basedVLANs plus one user-defined protocol basedVLAN where the administrator may  
configure the settings for the appropriate protocol and forwarding of packets (16 total). Selecting a specific  
protocol will indicate which protocol will be utilized in determining theVLAN ownership of a tagged packet.  
Pre-set protocol-basedVLANs on the switch include:  
port – Using this parameter will allow the creation of a normal 802.1QVLAN on the Switch.  
ip – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is based on the Ethernet protocol.  
rarp – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the Reverse Address  
Resolution (RARP) Protocol.  
ipx802dot3 – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the  
packet header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by Novell NetWare  
802.3 (IPX - Internet Packet Exchange).  
ipx802dot2 – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the  
packet header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by Novell NetWare  
802.2 (IPX - Internet Packet Exchange).  
ipxSnap – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by Novell and the Sub  
Network Access Protocol (SNAP).  
ipxEthernet2 – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the  
packet header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the Ethernet  
Protocol.  
AppleTalk – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the  
packet header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the AppleTalk  
protocol.  
decLAT – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the Digital Equipment  
Corporation (DEC) Local AreaTransport (LAT) protocol.  
decOther – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the  
packet header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the Digital  
Equipment Corporation (DEC) Protocol.  
sna802dot2 – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the  
packet header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the Systems  
Network Architecture(SNA) 802.2 Protocol.  
netBios – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the NetBIOS Protocol.  
xns – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the Xerox Network  
Systems (XNS) Protocol.  
vines – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the BanyanVirtual  
Integrated Network Service (VINES) Protocol.  
ipV6 – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the packet  
header is concurrent with this protocol.This packet header information is defined by the Internet Protocol  
Version 6 (IPv6) Protocol.  
userDefined – Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to thisVLAN if the tag in the  
packet header is concurrent with this protocol defined by the user.This packet header information is defined by  
entering the following information:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
User Defined Pid – Specifies that theVLAN will only accept packets with this hexadecimal 802.1Q Ethernet type  
value in the packet header.The user may define an entry, in the hexadecimal form (ffff) to define the packet  
identification. (The user only need enter the final four integers of the hexadecimal format to define the packet ID –{hex  
0x0 0xffff})This field is only operable if userDefined is selected in the Protocol ID field.  
encap [ethernet | llc | snap | all] – Specifies that the Switch will examine the octet of the packet header referring  
to one of the protocols listed (Ethernet, LLC or SNAP), looking for a match of the hexadecimal value  
previously entered . all will instruct the Switch to examine the total packet header.After a match is found, the  
Switch will forward the packet to thisVLAN.This field is only operable if userDefined is selected in the Protocol  
ID field.  
Port Settings  
Tag  
Allows an individual port to be specified as member of aVLAN.  
Specifies the port as either 802.1Q tagging or 802.1Q untagged. Checking the box will designate the port as  
Tagged.  
None  
Allows an individual port to be specified as a non-VLAN member.  
Egress  
Select this to specify the port as a static member of theVLAN. Egress member ports are ports that will be  
transmitting traffic for theVLAN.These ports can be either tagged or untagged.  
Forbidden  
Select this to specify the port as not being a member of theVLAN and that the port is forbidden from  
becoming a member of theVLAN dynamically.  
Click Apply to implement changes made. Click the Show All StaticVLAN Entries link to return to the Current 802.1Q Static VLAN Entries window.  
GVRP Setting  
In the Configuration menu, open the VLANs folder and click GVRP Setting.  
The 802.1Q Port Settings dialog box, shown below, allows you to determine whether the Switch will share itsVLAN configuration information with other  
GARPVLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) enabled switches. In addition, Ingress Checking can be used to limit traffic by filtering incoming packets whose  
PVID does not match the PVID of the port. Results can be seen in the table under the configuration settings, as seen below.  
Figure 6- 43. GVRP Settings andTable window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
From/To  
These two fields allow you to specify the range of ports that will be included in the Port-basedVLAN that you  
are creating using the 802.1Q Static VLANs page.  
GVRP  
The GroupVLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) enables the port to dynamically become a member of aVLAN.  
GVRP is Disabled by default.  
Ingress Check  
This field can be toggled using the space bar between Enabled and Disabled. Enabled enables the port to  
compare theVID tag of an incoming packet with the PVID number assigned to the port. If the two are different,  
the port filters (drops) the packet. Disabled disables ingress filtering. Ingress Checking is Disabled by default.  
Acceptable Frame Type  
PVID  
This field denotes the type of frame that will be accepted by the port.The user may choose between Tagged  
Only, which means onlyVLAN tagged frames will be accepted, and Admit_All, which means both tagged and  
untagged frames will be accepted. Admit_All is enabled by default.  
The read only field in the GVRPTable shows the current PVID assignment for each port, which may be  
manually assigned to aVLAN when created in the 802.1Q StaticVLANs table.The Switch's default is to assign  
all ports to the defaultVLAN with aVID of 1.The PVID is used by the port to tag outgoing, untagged packets,  
and to make filtering decisions about incoming packets. If the port is specified to accept only tagged frames – as  
tagging, and an untagged packet is forwarded to the port for transmission, the port will add an 802.1Q tag using  
the PVID to write theVID in the tag.When the packet arrives at its destination, the receiving device will use the  
PVID to makeVLAN forwarding decisions. If a packet is received by the port, and Ingress filtering is enabled, the  
port will compare theVID of the incoming packet to its PVID. If the two are unequal, the port will drop the  
packet. If the two are equal, the port will receive the packet.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
6-15 Traffic Control  
Use the Traffic Control menu to enable or disable storm control and adjust the threshold for multicast and broadcast storms, as well as DLF (Destination  
Look Up Failure).Traffic control settings are applied to individual Switch modules.  
To view the following window, click Configuration > Traffic Control:  
Figure 6- 44.Traffic Control Settings andTraffic ControlTable window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To configure Traffic Control, first select the Switch’s Unit ID number from the pull down menu and then a group of ports by using the Group pull down  
menu. Finally, enable or disable the Broadcast Storm, Multicast Storm and Destination Unknown using their corresponding pull-down menus.  
The purpose of this window is to limit too many broadcast, multicast or unknown unicast packets folding the network. Each port has a counter that tracks the  
number of broadcast packets received per second, and this counter is cleared once every second. If the broadcast, multicast or unknown unicast storm control is  
enabled, the port will discard all broadcast, multicast or unknown unicast packets received when the counter exceeds or equals theThreshold specified.  
The Threshold value is the upper threshold at which the specified traffic control is switched on.This is the number of Broadcast, Multicast or DLF packets, in  
Kpps (kilopackets per second), received by the Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measures.The Threshold value can be set from 0 to 255  
kilopackets per second.The default setting is 128.The settings of each port may be viewed in the Traffic Control Table in the same window. Click Apply to  
implement changes made.  
6-16 Port Security  
A given port's (or a range of ports') dynamic MAC address learning can be locked such that the current source MAC addresses entered into the MAC address  
forwarding table can not be changed once the port lock is enabled.The port can be locked by using the Admin State pull-down menu to Enabled, and clicking  
Apply.  
Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers (with source MAC addresses) unknown to the Switch prior to locking the port (or  
ports) from connecting to the Switch's locked ports and gaining access to the network.  
Figure 6- 45. Port Security Settings and Port SecurityTable window  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port.  
From/To  
Admin State  
This pull-down menu allows you to enable or disable Port Security (locked MAC address table for the selected  
ports).  
Max. Learning Addr. (0-64)  
Mode  
The number of MAC addresses that will be in the MAC address forwarding table for the selected switch and  
group of ports.  
This pull-down menu allows you to select how the MAC address table locking will be implemented on the  
Switch, for the selected group of ports.The options are:  
Permanent –The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires.  
DeleteOnTimeout –The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires.  
DeleteOnReset –The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-17 Port Lock Entries  
The Port Lock Entry Delete window is used to remove an entry from the port security entries learned by the Switch and entered into the forwarding  
database.To view the following window, click Configuration > Port Lock Entries:  
Figure 6- 46. Port Lock EntriesTable  
This function is only operable if the Mode in the Port Security window is selected as Permanent or DeleteOnReset, or in other words, only addresses  
that are permanently learned by the Switch can be deleted. Once the entry has been defined by entering the correct information into the window above, click  
the ꢀ under the Delete heading of the corresponding MAC address to be deleted. Click the Next button to view the next page of entries listed in this table.  
This window displays the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
VID  
TheVLAN ID of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch.  
VLAN NAME  
TheVLAN Name of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the  
Switch.  
MAC Address  
The MAC address of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the  
Switch.  
Unit  
Port  
Type  
The ID number of the Switch in the switch stack that has permanently learned the MAC address.  
The ID number of the port that has permanently learned the MAC address.  
The type of MAC address in the forwarding database table. Only entries marked Secured_Permanent can  
be deleted.  
Delete  
Click the ꢀ in this field to delete the corresponding MAC address that was permanently learned by the  
Switch.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
6-18 QoS  
The AT-9724TS supports 802.1p priority queuing Quality of Service.The following section discusses the implementation of QoS (Quality of Service) and benefits  
of using 802.1p priority queuing.  
The Advantages of QoS  
QoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802.1p standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving bandwidth for important functions that require  
a large bandwidth or have a high priority, such asVoIP (voice-over Internet Protocol), web browsing applications, file server applications or video conferencing.  
Not only can a larger bandwidth be created, but other less critical traffic can be limited, so excessive bandwidth can be saved.The Switch has separate hardware  
queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to, and, in turn prioritized.View the following map to see how the AT-  
9724TS implements 802.1P priority queuing.  
How 802.1p works (Switch default settings)  
7 priority queues  
Queues  
Priority  
Port  
Class 0  
Class 1  
Class 2  
Class 3  
Class 4  
Class 5  
Class 6  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3 4  
5
6
7 ............................  
Port default  
priority  
0
0
0
1
4
2
6
.........................................  
Figure 6- 47. Mapping QoS on the Switch  
The picture above shows the default priority setting for the Switch. Class-6 has the highest priority of the seven priority classes of service on the Switch. In order  
to implement QoS, the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag tagged.Then the user  
may forward these tagged packets to designated classes of service on the Switch where they will be emptied, based on priority.  
For example, lets say a user wishes to have a video conference between two remotely set computers.The administrator can add priority tags to the video  
packets being sent out, utilizing the Access Profile commands.Then, on the receiving end, the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets for this tag,  
acquires the tagged packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch.Then in turn, the administrator will set a priority for this queue so that will be  
emptied before any other packet is forwarded.This results in the end user receiving all packets sent as quickly as possible, thus prioritizing the queue and allowing  
for an uninterrupted stream of packets, which optimizes the use of bandwidth available for the video conference.  
Understanding QoS  
The Switch has eight priority classes of service, one of which is internal and unconfigurable.These priority classes of service are labelled as 6, the high class to 0,  
the lowest class.The eight priority tags, specified in IEEE 802.1p are mapped to the Switch's priority classes of service as follows:  
Priority 0 is assigned to the Switch's Q2 class.  
Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch's Q0 class.  
Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch's Q1 class.  
Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch's Q3 class.  
Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch's Q4 class.  
Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch's Q5 class.  
Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch's Q6 class.  
Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch's Q6 class.  
For strict priority-based scheduling, any packets residing in the higher priority classes of service are transmitted first. Multiple strict priority classes of service are  
emptied based on their priority tags. Only when these classes are empty, are packets of lower priority transmitted.  
For weighted round-robin queuing, the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight. For a configuration of 8 CoS queues,  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A~H with their respective weight value: 8~1, the packets are sent in the following sequence:A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1,A2, B2, C2, D2, E2, F2, G2,A3, B3, C3,  
D3, E3, F3,A4, B4, C4, D4, E4,A5, B5, C5, D5,A6, B6, C6,A7, B7,A8,A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1.  
For weighted round-robin queuing, if each CoS queue has the same weight value, then each CoS queue has an equal opportunity to send packets just like round-  
robin queuing.  
For weighted round-robin queuing, if the weight for a CoS is set to 0, then it will continue processing the packets from this CoS until there are no more packets  
for this CoS.The other CoS queues that have been given a nonzero value, and depending upon the weight, will follow a common weighted round-robin scheme.  
Remember that the AT-9724TS has 7 configurable priority queues (and seven Classes of Service) for each port on the Switch.  
ƽ
Caution: The Switch contains eight classes of service for each port on the Switch. One of these classes is reserved for internal use on the  
Switch and is therefore unconfigurable.All references in the following section regarding classes of service will refer to only the seven classes of  
service that may be used and configured by the Switch’s Administrator.  
Bandwidth Control  
The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected port. In the Configuration folder, click  
Bandwidth Control, to view the screen shown below.  
Figure 6- 48. Bandwidth Settings and Port BandwidthTable  
The following parameters can be set or are displayed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port.  
From/To  
Type  
This drop-down menu allows you to select between RX (receive,) TX (transmit,) and Both.This setting will  
determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving, transmitting, or both receiving and transmitting  
packets.  
no_limit  
Rate  
This drop-down menu allows you to specify that the selected port will have no bandwidth limit. Enabled  
disables the limit.  
This field allows you to enter the data rate, in Mbit/s, that will be the limit for the selected port.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
Click Apply to set the bandwidth control for the selected ports. Results of configured Bandwidth Settings will be displayed in the Port Bandwidth  
Table.  
QoS Scheduling Mechanism  
This drop-down menu allows you to select between a Weight Fair and a Strict mechanism for emptying the classes of service. In the Configuration folder  
open the QoS folder and click QoS Scheduling Mechanism, to view the screen shown below.  
Figure 6- 49. Scheduling Mechanism Configuration and QoS Scheduling MechanismTable  
The Scheduling Mechanism has the following parameters.  
Parameter  
Description  
Strict  
The highest queue is the first to process traffic.That is, the highest queue will finish before other queues empty.  
Use the weighted round-robin (WRR) algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority queues.  
Weight fair  
Click Apply to let your changes take effect.  
Output Scheduling  
QoS can be customized by changing the output scheduling used for the classes of service in the Switch. As with any changes to QoS implementation, careful  
consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower classes of service is affected. Changes in scheduling may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss  
or significant transmission delay. If you choose to customize this setting, it is important to monitor network performance, especially during peak demand, as  
bottlenecks can quickly develop if the QoS settings are not suitable. In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click QoS Output Scheduling,  
to view the screen shown below.  
Figure 6- 50. QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may assign the following values to the QoS classes to set the scheduling.  
Parameter  
Description  
Max. Packets  
Specifies the maximum number of packets the above specified hardware priority queue will be allowed to  
transmit before allowing the next lowest priority queue to transmit its packets.A value between 0 and 15 can  
be specified.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Note:  
Entering a 0 for the Max Packets field in the QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window above will create a Combination  
Queue. For more information on implementation of this feature, see the next section, Configuring the Combination Queue.  
Configuring the Combination Queue  
Utilizing the QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window shown above, the AT-9724TS can implement a combination queue for forwarding packets.  
This combination queue allows for a combination of strict and weight-fair (weighted round-robin “WRR”) scheduling for emptying given classes of service.To set  
the combination queue, enter a 0 for the Max Packets entry of the corresponding priority classes of service listed in the window above. Priority classes of service  
that have a 0 in the Max Packet field will forward packets with strict priority scheduling.The remaining classes of service, that do not have a 0 in their Max  
Packet field, will follow a weighted round-robin (WRR) method of forwarding packets – as long as the priority classes of service with a 0 in their Max Packet  
field are empty.When a packet arrives in a priority class with a 0 in its Max Packet field, this class of service will automatically begin forwarding packets until it  
is empty. Once a priority class of service with a 0 in its Max Packet field is empty, the remaining priority classes of service will reset the weighted round-robin  
(WRR) cycle of forwarding packets, starting with the highest available priority class of service. Priority classes of service with an equal level of priority and equal  
entries in their Max Packet field will empty their fields based on hardware priority scheduling.The Max Packet parameter allows you to specify the maximum  
number of packets a given priority class of service can transmit per weighted round-robin (WRR) scheduling cycle.This provides for a controllable CoS behavior  
while allowing other classes to empty as well.A value between 0 and 15 packets can be specified per priority class of service to create the combination queue.  
The example window below displays an example of the combination queue where Class-1 will have a strict priority for emptying its class, while the other classes  
will follow a weight fair scheduling.  
Figure 6- 51. QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window – Combination queue example  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
802.1p Default Priority  
The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802.1p priority to each port on the Switch. In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click 802.1p  
Default Priority, to view the screen shown below.  
Figure 6- 52. Port Default Priority Assignment andThe Port PriorityTable window  
This page allows you to assign a default 802.1p priority to any given port on the Switch.The priority queues are numbered from 0, the lowest priority, to 7, the  
highest priority.To implement a new default priority, choose the Switch of the Switch stack to be configured by using the Unit pull-down menu, choose a port  
range by using the From and To pull-down menus and then insert a priority value, from 0-7 in the Priority field. Click Apply to implement your settings.  
802.1p User Priority  
The AT-9724TS allows the assignment of classes of service to each of the 802.1p priorities. In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click  
802.1p User Priority, to view the screen shown below.  
Figure 6- 53. User Priority Configuration window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Once you have assigned a priority to the port groups on the Switch, you can then assign this Class to each of the7 levels of 802.1p priorities. Click Apply to set  
your changes.  
Traffic Segmentation  
Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single port to a group of ports on either a single Switch (in standalone mode) or a group of ports on  
another switch in a switch stack.This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to usingVLANs to limit traffic, but is more restrictive. It provides a  
method of directing traffic that does not increase the overhead of the Master switch CPU.  
In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click Traffic Segmentation, to view the screen shown below.  
Figure 6- 54. CurrentTraffic SegmentationTable  
Click on the Setup button to open the Setup Forwarding Ports page, as shown below.  
Figure 6- 55. Setup Forwarding Ports window  
This page allows you to determine which port on a given switch in a switch stack will be allowed to forward packets to other ports on that switch.  
Configuring traffic segmentation on the AT-9724TS is accomplished in two parts. First, you specify a switch from a switch stack by using the Unit pull-down  
menu, and then a port from that switch, using the Port pull-down menu.Then specify a second switch from the switch stack, and then you select which ports (or  
different ports on the same switch,) on that switch that you want to be able to receive packets from the switch and port you specified in the first part.  
Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch’sTraffic Segmentation table.  
The Unit drop-down menu at the top of the page allows you to select a switch from a switch stack using that switch’s Unit ID.The Port drop-down menu  
allows you to select a port from that switch.This is the port that will be transmitting packets.  
The Unit drop-down menu under the Setup Forwarding ports heading allows you to select a switch from a switch stack using that switch’s Unit ID.The  
Forward Port click boxes allow you to select which of the ports on the selected switch will be able to forward packets.These are the ports that will be  
allowed to receive packets from the port specified above.  
Click Apply to enter the settings into the Switch’s Traffic Segmentation table.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch's Traffic Segmentation Table.  
6-19 System Log Server  
The Switch can send Syslog messages to up to four designated servers using the System Log Server. In the Configuration folder, click System Log  
Server, to view the screen shown below.  
Figure 6- 56. System Log Servers window  
The parameters configured for adding and editing System Log Server settings are the same.To add a new Syslog Server, click the Add button.To modify a  
current entry, click the hyperlinked number of the server in the Index field. Both actions will result in the same screen to configure. See the table below for a  
description of the parameters in the following window.  
Figure 6- 57. System Log Servers – Add  
The following parameters can be set:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Index  
Syslog server settings index (1-4).  
The IP address of the Syslog server.  
Server IP  
Severity  
This drop-down menu allows you to select the level of messages that will be sent.The options are Warning,  
Informational, and All.  
Facility  
Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values. Processes and  
daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the "local use" facilities or they may use  
the "user-level" Facility.Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following: Bold font  
denotes the facility values that the Switch currently implements.  
Numerical Code  
Facility  
0
kernel messages  
1
user-level messages  
2
mail system  
3
system daemons  
4
security/authorization messages  
messages generated internally by syslog line printer subsystem  
network news subsystem  
UUCP subsystem  
5
7
8
9
clock daemon  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
security/authorization messages  
FTP daemon  
NTP subsystem  
log audit  
log alert  
clock daemon  
local use 0 (local0)  
local use 1 (local1)  
local use 2 (local2)  
local use 3 (local3)  
local use 4 (local4)  
local use 5 (local5)  
local use 6 (local6)  
local use 7 (local7)  
UDP Port (514 or 6000-65535) Type the UDP port number used for sending Syslog messages.The default is 514.  
Status Choose Enabled or Disabled to activate or deactivate.  
To set the System Log Server configuration, click Apply.To delete an entry from the Current System Log Server window, click the corresponding ꢀ  
under the Delete heading of the entry to delete.To return to the Current System Log Servers window, click the Show All System Log Servers link.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-20 SNTP Settings  
Current Time Settings  
To configure the time settings for the Switch, open the Configuration folder, then the SNTP folder and click on the Current Time Setting link, revealing  
the following screen for the user to configure.  
Figure 6- 58.Time Settings Page  
The following parameters can be set or are displayed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Current Time: Status  
System Boot Time  
Current Time  
Time Source  
Displays the time when the Switch was initially started for this session.  
Displays the current time.  
Displays the source of the time settings viewed here.  
Current Time: SNTP Settings  
SNTP State  
Use this pull-down menu to Enable or Disable SNTP.  
SNTP Primary Server  
SNTP Secondary Server  
This is the IP address of the primary server the SNTP information will be taken from.  
This is the IP address of the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from.  
SNTP Poll Interval in Seconds This is the interval, in seconds, between requests for updated SNTP information.  
(30-99999)  
Current Time: Set Current Time  
Year  
Enter the current year, if you want to update the system clock.  
Month  
Enter the current month, if you would like to update the system clock.  
Enter the current day, if you would like to update the system clock.  
Enter the current time in hours and minutes, if you would like to update the system clock.  
Day  
Time in HH MM SS  
Click Apply to implement your changes.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time Zone and DST  
The following are screens used to configure time zones and Daylight Savings time settings for SNTP. Open the Configuration folder, then the SNTP folder  
and click on the Time Zone and DST link, revealing the following screen.  
Figure 6- 59.Time Zone and DST Settings Page  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Daylight Saving Time State  
Use this pull-down menu to Enable or Disable the DST Settings.  
Daylight Saving Time Offset  
in Minutes  
Use this pull-down menu to specify the amount of time that will constitute your local DST offset - 30, 60, 90, or  
120 minutes.  
Time Zone Offset from GMT in Use these pull-down menus to specify your local time zone's offset from Greenwich MeanTime (GMT.)  
+/- HH:MM  
DST Repeating Settings  
Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment. Repeating mode requires that the DST  
beginning and ending date be specified using a formula. For example, specify to begin DST on Saturday during  
the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October.  
From: Which Day  
From: Day of Week  
From: Month  
Enter the week of the month that DST will start.  
Enter the day of the week that DST will start on.  
Enter the month DST will start on.  
From: Time in HH:MM  
To: Which Day  
Enter the time of day that DST will start on.  
Enter the week of the month the DST will end.  
Enter the day of the week that DST will end.  
Enter the month that DST will end.  
To: Day of Week  
To: Month  
To: time in HH:MM  
DST Annual Settings  
Enter the time DST will end.  
Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment.Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and  
ending date be specified concisely. For example, specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14.  
From: Month  
From: Day  
Enter the month DST will start on, each year.  
Enter the day of the month DST will start on, each year.  
Enter the time of day DST will start on, each year.  
Enter the month DST will end on, each year.  
From: Time in HH:MM  
To: Month  
To: Day  
Enter the day of the month DST will end on, each year.  
Enter the time of day that DST will end on, each year.  
To: Time in HH:MM  
Click Apply to implement changes made to the Time Zone and DST window.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-21 Access Profile Table  
Configuring the Access Profile Table  
Access profiles allow you to establish criteria to determine whether or not the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet's  
header.These criteria can be specified on a basis ofVLAN, MAC address or IP address.  
Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts.The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine, such as the MAC source  
address or the IP destination address.The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame.The entire process is  
described below in two parts.  
To display the currently configured Access Profiles on the Switch, open the Configuration folder and click on the Access Profile Table link.This will open  
the Access Profile Table page, as shown below.  
Figure 6- 60.Access ProfileTable  
To add an entry to the Access Profile Table, click the Add button.This will open the Access Profile Configuration page, as shown below.There are  
three Access Profile Configuration pages; one for Ethernet (or MAC address-based) profile configuration, one for IP address-based profile configuration  
and one for the Packet Content Mask.You can switch between the three Access Profile Configuration pages by using the Type drop-down menu.  
The page shown below is the Ethernet Access Profile Configuration page.  
Figure 6- 61.Access ProfileTable (Ethernet)  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following parameters can be set, for the Ethernet type:  
Parameter  
Description  
Profile ID (1-8)  
Type  
Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set.This value can be set from 1 - 8.  
Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IP address or packet content mask.This will change the menu  
according to the requirements for the type of profile.  
Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header.  
Select IP to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame's header.  
Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header.  
VLAN  
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine theVLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as  
the full or partial criterion for forwarding.  
Source MAC  
Destination MAC  
802.1p  
Source MAC Mask – Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address.  
Destination MAC Mask – Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address.  
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802.1p priority value of each packet header and use  
this as the, or part of the criterion for forwarding.  
Ethernet type  
Port  
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame's header.  
The user may set the Access ProfileTable on a per-port basis by entering a port number in this field.The port  
list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that switch, separated by  
a colon.Then the highest switch number, and the highest port number of the range (also separated by a colon)  
are specified.The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash. For example, 1:3 specifies  
switch number 1, port 3. 2:4 specifies switch number 2, port 4. 1:3 -2:4 specifies all of the ports between switch  
1, port 3 and switch 2, port 4 • in numerical order. Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch.  
The page shown below is the IP Access Profile Configuration page.  
Figure 6- 62.Access Profile Configuration (IP)  
The following parameters can be set, for IP:  
Parameter  
Description  
Profile ID (1-8)  
Type  
Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set.This value can be set from 1 - 8.  
Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IP address or packet content mask.This will change the menu  
according to the requirements for the type of profile.  
Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header.  
Select IP to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame's header.  
Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header.  
VLAN  
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine theVLAN part of each packet header and use this as the,  
or part of the criterion for forwarding.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Source IP Mask  
Destination IP Mask  
DSCP  
Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address.  
Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address.  
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this  
as the, or part of the criterion for forwarding.  
Protocol  
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame's header.You must  
then specify what protocol(s) to include according to the following guidelines:  
Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) field in each  
frame's header.  
Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value, or specify Code  
to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value.  
Select IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) field in each  
frame's header.  
Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value.  
Select TCP to use theTCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion. Selecting  
TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and/or a destination port mask.The user may also identify  
which flag bits to filter. Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet.The user may  
filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets, by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag  
bits of theTCP field.The user may choose between urg (urgent), ack (acknowledgement), psh (push), rst  
(reset), syn (synchronize), fin (finish).  
src port mask – Specify aTCP port mask for the source port in hex form (hex 0x0-0xffff), which  
you wish to deny.  
dest port mask – Specify aTCP port mask for the destination port in hex form (hex 0x0-0xffff)  
which you wish to deny.  
Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion.  
Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and/or a destination port mask.  
src port mask – Specify aTCP port mask for the source port in hex form (hex 0x0-0xffff).  
dest port mask – Specify aTCP port mask for the destination port in hex form (hex 0x0-0xffff).  
protocol id – Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask. Specify the protocol ID  
mask in hex form (hex 0x0-0xffffffff).  
Port  
The user may set the Access ProfileTable on a per-port basis by entering an entry in this field. Entering all will  
denote all ports on the Switch.The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning  
port number on that switch, separated by a colon.Then the highest switch number, and the highest port  
number of the range (also separated by a colon) are specified.The beginning and end of the port list range are  
separated by a dash. For example, 1:3 specifies switch number 1, port 3. 2:4 specifies switch number 2, port 4.  
1:3 - 2:4 specifies all of the ports between switch 1, port 3 and switch 2, port 4 •in numerical order. Entering all  
will denote all ports on the Switch.  
The page shown below is the Packet Content Mask configuration window.  
Figure 6- 63.Access Profile Configuration window (Packet Content Mask)  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This screen will aid the user in configuring the Switch to mask packet headers beginning with the offset value specified.The following fields are used to configure  
the Packet Content Mask:  
Parameter  
Description  
Profile ID (1-8)  
Type  
Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set.This value can be set from 1 - 8.  
Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IP address or packet content mask.This will change the menu  
according to the requirements for the type of profile.  
Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header.  
Select IP to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame's header.  
Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header.  
This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified:  
value (0-15) - Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte.  
value (16-31) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31.  
value (32-47) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47.  
value (48-63) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63.  
value (64-79) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79.  
Offset  
Port  
The user may set the Access ProfileTable on a per-port basis by entering an entry in this field. Entering all will  
denote all ports on the Switch.The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning  
port number on that switch, separated by a colon.Then the highest switch number, and the highest port  
number of the range (also separated by a colon) are specified.The beginning and end of the port list range are  
separated by a dash. For example, 1:3 specifies switch number 1, port 3. 2:4 specifies switch number 2, port 4.  
1:3 - 2:4 specifies all of the ports between switch 1, port 3 and switch 2, port 4 •in numerical order. Entering all  
will denote all ports on the Switch.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
To establish the rule for a previously created Access Profile:  
In the Configuration folder, click the Access Profile Table link opening the Access Profile Table. Under the heading Access Rule, clicking Modify,  
will open the following window.  
Figure 6- 64.Access RuleTable window – IP  
To create a new rule set for an access profile click the Add button. A new window is displayed.To remove a previously created rule, click the corresponding ꢀ  
button.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 65.Access Rule Configuration window (IP)  
Configure the following Access Rule Configuration settings for IP:  
Parameter  
Description  
Profile ID  
Mode  
This is the identifier number for this profile set.  
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch, according  
to any additional rule added (see below).  
Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and  
will be filtered.  
Access ID  
Type  
Type in a unique identifier number for this access.This value can be set from 1-50.  
Selected profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IP address or Packet Content Mask.  
Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header.  
IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame's header.  
Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header.  
Priority (0-7)  
This parameter is specified if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority previously set in the Switch,  
which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to. Once this field is specified,  
packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by  
the user.  
Replace priority with – Click the corresponding box if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a  
packet to the value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this  
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet will have its incoming  
802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch. For more  
information on priority queues, CoS queues and mapping for 802.1p, see the QoS section of this manual.  
Replace Dscp (0-63)  
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value (in a packet that meets the selected  
criteria) with the value entered in the adjacent field.  
VLAN Name  
Source IP  
Allows the entry of a name for a previously configuredVLAN.  
Enter an IP Address mask for the source IP address.  
Enter an IP Address mask for the destination IP address.  
Destination IP  
Dscp (0-63)  
This field allows the user to enter a DSCP value in the space provided, which will instruct the Switch to  
examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the, or part of the criterion for  
forwarding.The user may choose a value between 0 and 63.  
Protocol  
This field allows the user to modify the protocol used to configure the Access RuleTable; depending on which  
protocol the user has chosen in the Access ProfileTable.  
To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule, click View in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 66.Access Rule Display window (IP)  
To configure the Access Rule for Ethernet, open the Access Profile Table and click Modify for an Ethernet entry.This will open the following screen:  
Figure 6- 67.Access RuleTable  
To remove a previously created rule, select it and click the ꢀ button.To add a new Access Rule, click the Add button:  
Figure 6- 68.Access Rule Configuration window – Ethernet  
To set the Access Rule for Ethernet, adjust the following parameters and click Apply.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Profile ID  
Mode  
This is the identifier number for this profile set.  
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch, according  
to any additional rule added (see below).  
Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and  
will be filtered.  
Access ID  
Type  
Type in a unique identifier number for this access.This value can be set from 1 - 50.  
Selected profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IP address or Packet Content Mask.  
Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header.  
IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame's header.  
Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header  
Priority (0-7)  
This parameter is specified if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority previously set in the Switch,  
which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to. Once this field is specified,  
packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by  
the user.  
Replace priority with – Click the corresponding box if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a  
packet to the value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this  
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet will have its incoming  
802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch.  
For more information on priority queues, CoS queues and mapping for 802.1p, see the QoS section of this  
manual.  
VLAN Name  
Allows the entry of a name for a previously configuredVLAN.  
Enter a MAC Address for the source MAC address.  
Source MAC Source  
Destination MAC Destination Enter a MAC Address mask for the destination MAC address.  
802.1p (0-7)  
Enter a value from 0-7 to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802.1p priority  
value.  
Ethernet Type  
Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802.1Q Ethernet type value  
(hex 0x0-0xffff) in the packet header.The Ethernet type value may be set in the form: hex 0x0-0xffff, which  
means the user may choose any combination of letters and numbers ranging from a-f and from 0-9999.  
To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule, click View in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen:  
Figure 6- 69.Access Rule Display window (Ethernet)  
To configure the Access Rule for Packet Content Mask, open the Access Profile Table and click Modify for a Packet Content Mask entry.This  
will open the following screen:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 70.Access RuleTable (Packet Content Mask)  
To remove a previously created rule, select it and click the ꢀ button.To add a new Access Rule, click the Add button:  
Figure 6- 71.Access Rule Configuration – Packet Content Mask  
To set the Access Rule for the Packet Content Mask, adjust the following parameters and click Apply.  
Parameter  
Description  
Profile ID  
Mode  
This is the identifier number for this profile set.  
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch, according  
to any additional rule added (see below).  
Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and  
will be filtered.  
Access ID  
Type  
Type in a unique identifier number for this access.This value can be set from 1 - 50.  
Selected profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IP address or Packet Content Mask.  
Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header.  
IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame's header.  
Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Priority  
This parameter is specified if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority previously set in the Switch,  
which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to. Once this field is specified,  
packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by  
the user.  
Replace priority with – Click the corresponding box if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a  
packet to the value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this  
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet will have its incoming  
802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch.  
For more information on priority queues, CoS queues and mapping for 802.1p, see the QoS section of this  
manual.  
Offset  
This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified:  
value (0-15) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte.  
value (16-31) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31.  
value (32-47) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47.  
value (48-63) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63.  
value (64-79) – Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79.  
To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule, click View in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen:  
Figure 6- 72.Access Rule Display window (Packet Content Mask)  
6-22 Port Access Entity (802.1x)  
Understanding 802.1x Port-based and MAC-based Network Access Control  
The original intent behind the development of 802.1X was to leverage the characteristics of point-to-point connections associated with UTP based LANs.All  
single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it, one of which is a Bridge Port.The Bridge Port detects events that  
indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link, or an active device becoming inactive.These events can be used to control the  
authorization state of the Port and initiate the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized.This is the Port-Based Network Access  
Control.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port-Based Network Access Control  
AT-9724TS Switch  
Uncontrolled Port  
Controlled Port - port blocked  
802.1X Client  
802.1X Client 802.1X Client  
802.1X Client  
RADIUS  
Server  
Figure 6- 73. Example ofTypical Port-Based Configuration  
Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated, the Port then becomes Authorized, and all subsequent traffic on the Port is not subject to access  
control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to become Unauthorized. Hence, if the Port is actually connected to a shared media LAN segment  
with more than one attached device, successfully authenticating one of the attached devices effectively provides access to the LAN for all devices on the shared  
segment. Clearly, the security offered in this situation is open to attack.  
MAC-Based Network Access Control  
Uncontrolled Port  
AT-9724TS Switch  
Controlled Port - port blocked  
RADIUS  
Server  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
802.1X  
Client  
Figure 6- 74. Example ofTypical MAC-Based Configuration  
In order to successfully make use of 802.1X in a shared media LAN segment, it would be necessary to create “logical” Ports, one for each attached device that  
required access to the LAN.The Switch would regard the single physical Port connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct  
logical Ports, each logical Port being independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state.The Switch learns each  
attached devices’ individual MAC addresses, and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then use to communicate with the LAN via the  
Switch.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configure Authenticator  
To configure the 802.1X Authenticator Settings, click PAE Access Entity > Configure Authenticator:  
Figure 6- 75. 802.1X Authenticator Settings window  
To view the 802.1X Authenticator settings on a different switch in the switch stack, use the Unit pull-down menu to select that switch by its ID number in the  
switch stack.To configure the settings by port, click on the hyperlinked port number under the Port heading, which will display the following table to configure:  
Figure 6- 76. 802.1X Authenticator Settings – Modify  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This screen allows you to set the following features:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
Enter the port or ports to be set.  
From [ ] To [ ]  
AdmCtrlDir  
Sets the administrative-controlled direction to either in or both.  
If in is selected, control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port you selected in the first field.  
If both is selected, control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the controlled port  
selected in the first field.  
PortControl  
This allows you to control the port authorization state.  
Select forceAuthorized to disable 802.1X and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any  
authentication exchange required.This means the port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802.1X-  
based authentication of the client.  
If forceUnauthorized is selected, the port will remain in the unauthorized state, ignoring all attempts by the client  
to authenticate.The Switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface.  
If Auto is selected, it will enable 802.1X and cause the port to begin in the unauthorized state, allowing only  
EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port.The authentication process begins when the link state  
of the port transitions from down to up, or when an EAPOL-start frame is received.The Switch then requests  
the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication  
server.  
The default setting is Auto.  
TxPeriod  
This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine.This value determines the period of  
an EAP Request/Identity packet transmitted to the client.The default setting is 30 seconds.  
QuietPeriod  
SuppTimeout  
ServerTimeout  
MaxReq  
This allows you to set the number of seconds that the Switch remains in the quiet state following a failed  
authentication exchange with the client.The default setting is 60 seconds.  
This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the client.The  
default setting is 30 seconds.  
This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the authentication  
server.The default setting is 30 seconds.  
The maximum number of times that the Switch will retransmit an EAP Request to the client before it times out  
of the authentication sessions.The default setting is 2.  
ReAuthPeriod  
ReAuth  
A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic reauthentication of the client.The  
default setting is 3600 seconds.  
Determines whether regular reauthentication will take place on this port.The default setting is Disabled.  
Click Apply to implement your configuration changes.To view configurations for the 802.1X Authenticator Settings on a port-by-port basis, see the  
802.1X Authenticator Settings table.  
Local Users  
In the configuration folder, open the Port Access Entity folder and click Local users to open the 802.1x Local User Table Configuration window.  
This window will allow the user to set different local users on the Switch.  
Figure 6- 77. 802.1x Local UserTable Configuration and 802.1x Local UserTable window  
Enter a User Name, Password and confirmation of that password. Properly configured local users will be displayed in the 802.1x Local User Table in  
the same window.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAE System Control  
Existing 802.1x port settings are displayed and can be configured using the windows below.  
Port Capability Settings  
Click Port Access Entity > PAE System Control > 802.1X Capability Settings to view the following window:  
Figure 6- 78. 802.1x Capability Settings andTable window  
To set up the Switch's 802.1x port-based authentication, select the switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select which ports are  
to be configured in the From and To fields. Next, enable the ports by selecting Authenticator from the drop-down menu under Capability. Click Apply to let  
your change take effect.  
Configure the following 802.1x capability settings:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
Ports being configured for 802.1x settings.  
From and To  
Capability  
Two role choices can be selected:  
Authenticator – A user must pass the authentication process to gain access to the network.  
None –The port is not controlled by the 802.1x functions.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
Initializing Ports for Port Based 802.1x  
Existing 802.1x port settings are displayed and can be configured using the window below.  
Note:  
Ensure Port Based 802.1x is enabled under Configuration > Advanced Settings.  
Click Port Access Entity > PAE System Control > Initialize Port(s) to open the following window:  
Figure 6- 79. Initialize Port window (Port-based)  
This window allows you to initialize a port or group of ports.The Initialize Port Table in the bottom half of the window displays the current status of the  
port(s).  
This window displays the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
To Select ports to be initialized.  
From and  
Port  
A read only field indicating a port on the Switch.  
Auth PAE State  
The Authenticator PAE State will display one of the following: Initialize, Disconnected, Connecting,, Authenticating,,  
Authenticated, Aborting, Held, ForceAuth, ForceUnauth, and N/A.  
Backend State  
Port Status  
The Backend Authentication State will display one of the following: Request, Response, Success, Fail, Timeout, Idle,  
Initialize, and N/A.  
The status of the controlled port can be Authorized, Unauthorized, or N/A.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
Initializing Ports for MAC Based 802.1x  
To initialize ports for the MAC side of 802.1x, the user must first enable 802.1x by MAC address in the Advanced Settings window. Click Port Access  
Entity > PAE System Control > Initialize Port(s) to open the following window:  
Figure 6- 80. Initialize Ports window (MAC based 802.1x)  
To initialize ports, first choose the switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu, then the range of ports in the From and To field.Then the  
user must specify the MAC address to be initialized by entering it into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box.To begin the  
initialization, click Apply.  
Note:  
The user must first globally enable 802.1X in the Advanced Settings window in the Configuration folder before initializing ports.  
Information in the Initialize Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802.1X.  
Reauthenticate Port(s) for Port Based 802.1x  
This window allows you to reauthenticate a port or group of ports by choosing a port or group of ports by using the pull down menus From and To and  
clicking Apply.The Reauthenticate Port Table displays the current status of the reauthenticated port(s) once you have clicked Apply.  
Click Port Access Entity > PAE System Control > Reauthenticate Port(s) to open the Reauthenticate Port(s) window:  
Figure 6- 81. Reauthenticate Port and Reauthenticate PortTable window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This window displays the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit  
Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified.  
The port number of the reauthenticated port.  
Port  
Auth State  
The Authenticator State will display one of the following: Initialize, Disconnected, Connecting, Authenticating,  
Authenticated, Aborting, Held, ForceAuth, ForceUnauth, and N/A.  
BackendState  
OpenDir  
The Backend State will display one of the following: Request, Response, Success, Fail, Timeout, Idle, Initialize, and N/A.  
Operational Controlled Directions are both and in.  
PortStatus  
The status of the controlled port can be Authorized, Unauthorized, or N/A.  
Note:  
The user must first globally enable 802.1X in the Advanced Settings window in the Configuration folder before reauthenticating  
ports. Information in the Reauthenticate Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802.1X.  
Reauthenticate Port(s) for MAC Based 802.1x  
To reauthenticate ports for the MAC side of 802.1x, the user must first enable 802.1x by MAC address in the Advanced Settings window. Click Port  
Access Entity > PAE System Control > Reauthenticate Port(s) to open the following window:  
Figure 6- 82. Reauthenticate Ports – MAC based 802.1x  
To reauthenticate ports, first choose the switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu, then the range of ports in the From and To field.Then  
the user must specify the MAC address to be reauthenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box.To begin  
the reauthentication, click Apply.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RADIUS Server  
The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows you to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing protection against a sniffing, active hacker.TheWeb  
Manager offers three windows.  
Click Port Access Entity > RADIUS Server > Authentic Radius Server to open the RADIUS Server Authentication Setting window  
shown below:  
Figure 6- 83.Authentic RADIUS Server Setting and Current RADIUS Server SettingsTable window  
This window displays the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
Succession  
RADIUS Server  
Authentic Port  
Accounting Port  
Key  
Choose the desired RADIUS server to configure: First, Second or Third.  
Set the RADIUS server IP.  
Set the RADIUS authentic server(s) UDP port.The default port is 1812.  
Set the RADIUS account server(s) UDP port.The default port is 1813.  
Set the key the same as that of the RADIUS server.  
Confirm Key  
Status  
Confirm the shared key is the same as that of the RADIUS server.  
This allows you to set the RADIUS Server asValid (Enabled) or Invalid (Disabled).  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
6-23 Layer 3 IP Networking  
Layer 3 Global Advanced Settings  
The L3 Global Advanced Settings window allows the user to enable and disable Layer 3 settings and functions from a single window.The full settings and  
descriptions for these functions will appear later in this section.To view this window, open the Configuration folder and then the Layer 3 IP Networking  
folder and click on the L3 Global Advanced Settings link to access the following window.  
Figure 6- 84. L3 Global Advanced Settings window  
The user may set the following:  
Parameter  
Description  
DVMRP State  
The user may globally enable or disable the DistanceVector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) function by  
using the pull down menu.  
PIM-DM State  
RIP State  
The user may globally enable or disable the Protocol Independent Multicast – Dense Mode (PIM-DM) function  
by using the pull down menu.  
The user may globally enable or disable the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) function by using the pull down  
menu.  
OSPF State  
The user may globally enable or disable the Open Shortest Path first (OSPF) function by using the pull down  
menu.  
ARP Aging Time (0-65535)  
The user may globally set the maximum amount of time, in minutes, that an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)  
entry can remain in the Switch’s ARP table, without being accessed, before it is dropped from the table.The  
value may be set in the range of 0-65535 minutes with a default setting of 20 minutes.  
Setting Up IP Interfaces  
EachVLAN must be configured prior to setting up theVLAN’s corresponding IP interface.  
An example is presented below:  
VLAN Name  
VID  
Switch Ports  
System (default)  
Engineer  
Marketing  
Finance  
1
2
3
4
5
6
5, 6, 7, 8, 21, 22, 23, 24  
9, 10, 11, 12  
13, 14, 15, 16  
17, 18, 19, 20  
1, 2, 3, 4  
Sales  
Backbone  
25, 26  
Table 6- 5.VLAN Example – Assigned Ports  
In this case, six IP interfaces are required, so a CIDR notation of 10.32.0.0/11 (or a 11-bit) addressing scheme will work.This addressing scheme will give a subnet  
mask of 11111111.11100000.00000000.00000000 (binary) or 255.224.0.0 (decimal).  
Using a 10.xxx.xxx.xxx IP address notation, the above example would give 6 network addresses and 6 subnets.  
Any IP address from the allowed range of IP addresses for each subnet can be chosen as an IP address for an IP interface on the switch.  
For this example, we have chosen the next IP address above the network address for the IP interface’s IP Address:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VLAN Name  
VID  
Network Number  
IP Address  
System (default)  
Engineer  
Marketing  
Finance  
1
2
3
4
5
6
10.32.0.0  
10.64.0.0  
10.96.0.0  
10.128.0.0  
10.160.0.0  
10.192.0.0  
10.32.0.1  
10.64.0.1  
10.96.0.1  
10.128.0.1  
10.160.0.1  
10.192.0.1  
Sales  
Backbone  
Table 6- 6.VLAN Example – Assigned IP Interfaces  
The 6 IP interfaces, each with an IP address (listed in the table above), and a subnet mask of 255.224.0.0 can be entered into the Setup IP Interface window.  
To setup IP Interfaces on the Switch:  
Go to the Configuration folder, and click on the Layer 3 IP Networking folder, and then click on the IP Interfaces Table link to open the following  
dialog box:  
Figure 6- 85. IP InterfaceTable window  
To setup a new IP interface, click the Add button.To edit an existing IP Interface entry, click on an entry under the Interface Name heading. Both actions will  
result in the same screen to configure, as shown below.  
Figure 6- 86. IP Interface Configuration – Add window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 87. IP Interface Configuration – Edit window  
Choose a name for the interface to be added and enter it in the Interface Name field (if you are editing an IP Interface, the Interface Name will already  
be in the top field as seen in the window above). Enter the interface’s IP address and subnet mask in the corresponding fields. Pull the State pull-down menu to  
Enabled and click Apply to enter to make the IP interface effective.To view entries in the IP Interface Table, click the Show All IP Interface Entries  
hyperlink. Use the Save Changes dialog box from the Maintenance folder to enter the changes into NV-RAM.  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
IP Address  
This field displays the name for the IP interface.The default IP interface is named “System”.  
This field allows the entry of an IP address to be assigned to this IP interface.  
This field allows the entry of a subnet mask to be applied to this IP interface.  
This field allows the entry of theVLAN Name for theVLAN the IP interface belongs to.  
Subnet Mask  
VLAN Name  
Secondary  
Use the pull-down menu to set the IP interface as True or False. True will set the interface as secondary and  
False will denote the interface as the primary interface of theVLAN entered above. Secondary interfaces can  
only be configured if a primary interface is first configured.  
State  
This field may be altered between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu.This entry determines  
whether the interface will be active or not.  
Link Status  
This read only field states the current status of the IP Interface on the Switch. Link Up denotes that the IP  
interface is up and running on the Switch. Link Down will denote that the IP interface is not currently set  
and/or enabled on the Switch.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
MD5 Key Table Configuration  
The MD5 Key Table Configuration menu allows the entry of a sixteen-character Message Digest – version 5 (MD5) key which can be used to authenticate  
every packet exchanged between OSPF routers. It is used as a security mechanism to limit the exchange of network topology information to the OSPF routing  
domain.  
MD5 Keys created here can be used in the OSPF Interface Configuration menu below.  
To configure an MD5 Key, click the MD5 Key link to open the following dialog box:  
Figure 6- 88. MD5 Key Setting andTable window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Key ID  
Key  
A number from 1 to 255 used to identify the MD5 Key.  
A alphanumeric string of between 1 and 16 case-sensitive characters used to generate the Message Digest  
which is in turn, used to authenticate OSPF packets within the OSPF routing domain.  
Click Apply to enter the new Key ID settings.To delete a Key ID entry, click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete heading.  
Route Redistribution Settings  
Route redistribution allows routers on the network, which are running different routing protocols to exchange routing information.This is accomplished by  
comparing the routes stored in the various routers routing tables and assigning appropriate metrics.This information is then exchanged among the various  
routers according to the individual routers current routing protocol.The Switch can redistribute routing information between the OSPF and RIP routing  
protocols to all routers on the network that are running OSPF or RIP. Routing information entered into the Static Routing Table on the local AT-9724TS  
switch is also redistributed.  
Routing information source – OSPF and the Static Route table. Routing information will be redistributed to RIP.The following table lists the allowed values for  
the routing metrics and the types (or forms) of the routing information that will be redistributed.  
Route Source  
Metric  
Type  
OSPF  
0 to 16  
All  
Internal  
External  
ExtType1  
ExtType2  
Inter-E1  
Inter-E2  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Type 1  
Type 2  
RIP  
0 to 16777214  
0 to 16777214  
0 to 16777214  
Static  
Local  
Table 6- 7. Route Redistribution Source table  
Entering theType combination – internal type_1 type_2 is functionally equivalent to all. Entering the combination type_1 type_2 is functionally equivalent to  
external. Entering the combination internal external is functionally equivalent to all.  
Entering the metric 0 specifies transparency.  
This window will redistribute routing information between the OSPF and RIP routing protocols to all routers on the network that are running OSPF or RIP.To  
access the Route Redistribution Table Configuration window, go to Configuration > Layer 3 IP Networking > Route Redistribution  
Settings:  
Figure 6- 89. Route Redistribution Settings andTable window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following parameters may be set or viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Dest Protocol  
Src Protocol  
Type  
Allows for the selection of the protocol for the destination device. Choose between RIP and OSPF.  
Allows for the selection of the protocol for the source device. Choose between RIP, OSPF, Static and Local.  
Allows for the selection of one of six methods of calculating the metric value.The user may choose between  
All, Internal, External, ExtType1, ExtType2, Inter-E1, Inter-E2. See the table above for available metric value types for  
each source protocol.  
Metric  
Allows the entry of an OSPF interface cost.This is analogous to a Hop Count in the RIP routing protocol.  
Click Add/Modify to implement changes made.  
Note:  
The source protocol (Src Protocol) entry and the destination protocol (Dest Protocol) entry cannot be the same.  
Static/Default Route  
Entries into the Switch’s forwarding table can be made using both MAC addresses and IP addresses. Static IP forwarding is accomplished by the entry of an IP  
address into the Switch’s Static IP Routing Table.  
Figure 6- 90. Static/Default Route Settings window  
This window shows the following values:  
Parameter  
Description  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway  
Hops  
The IP address of the Static/Default Route.  
The corresponding Subnet Mask of the IP address entered into the table.  
The corresponding Gateway of the IP address entered into the table.  
Represents the metric value of the IP interface entered into the table.This field may read a number between 1-  
65535 for an OSPF setting, and 1-16 for a RIP setting.  
Protocol  
Represents the protocol used for the RoutingTable entry of the IP interface.This field may read OSPF, RIP,  
Static or Local.  
Backup State  
Delete  
Represents the Backup state that this IP interface is configured for.This field may read Primary or Backup.  
Click the ꢀ if you would like to delete this entry from the Static/Default Route Settings table.  
To enter an IP Interface into the Switch’s Static/Default Routes window, click the Add button, revealing the following window to configure.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 91. Static/Default Route Settings – Add window  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
IP Address  
Allows the entry of an IP address that will be a static entry into the Switch’s RoutingTable.  
Allows the entry of a subnet mask corresponding to the IP address above.  
Allows the entry of an IP address of a gateway for the IP address above.  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway IP  
Metric (1-65535)  
Allows the entry of a routing protocol metric representing the number of routers between the Switch and the  
IP address above.  
Backup State  
The user may choose between Primary and Backup. If the Primary Static/Default Route fails, the Backup Route  
will support the entry. Please take note that the Primary and Backup entries cannot have the same Gateway.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Route Preference Settings  
Route Preference is a way for routers to select the best path when there are two or more different routes to the same destination from two different routing  
protocols.The majority of routing protocols are not compatible when used in conjunction with each other.This Switch supports and may be configured for many  
routing protocols, as a stand-alone switch or more importantly, in utilizing the stacking function and Single IP Management of the Switch.Therefore, the ability to  
exchange route information and select the best path is essential to optimal use of the Switch and its capabilities.  
The first decision the Switch will make in selecting the best path is to consult the Route Preference Settings table of the switch.This table can be viewed by  
clicking Configuration > Layer 3 IP Networking > Route Preference Settings, and it holds the list of possible routing protocols currently  
implemented on the Switch, along with a Preference value which determines which routing protocol will be the most dependable to route packets. Below is a  
list of the default route preferences set on the Switch.  
Route Type  
Validity Range  
Default Value  
Local  
0 – Permanently set on the switch and unconfigurable.  
0
Static  
1 – 999  
1 – 999  
1 – 999  
1 – 999  
1 – 999  
1 – 999  
60  
OSPF Intra  
OSPF Inter  
RIP  
80  
90  
100  
110  
115  
OSPF ExtT1  
OSPF ExtT2  
Table 6- 8. Route PreferenceTable  
As shown above, Local will always be the first choice for routing purposes and the next most reliable path is Static due to the fact that its has the next lowest  
value.To set a higher reliability for a route, change its value to a number less than the value of a route preference that has a greater reliability value using the  
New Route Preference Settings window command. For example, if the user wishes to make RIP the most reliable route, the user can change its value to  
one that is less than the lowest value (Static - 60) or the user could change the other route values to more than 100.  
The user should be aware of three points before configuring the route preference:  
1.  
2.  
No two route preference values can be the same. Entering the same route preference may cause the switch to crash due to indecision by the switch.  
If the user is not fully aware of all the features and functions of the routing protocols on the switch, a change in the default route preference value  
may cause routing loops or black holes.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
3.  
After changing the route preference value for a specific routing protocol, that protocol needs to be restarted because the previously learned routes  
have been dropped from the Switch.The Switch must learn the routes again before the new settings can take effect.  
To view the Route Preference Settings window, click Configuration > Layer 3 IP Networking > Route Preference Settings:  
Figure 6- 92. Current and New Route Preference Settings window  
The following fields can be viewed or set:  
Parameter  
Description  
RIP (1-999)  
Enter a value between 1 and 999 to set the route preference for RIP.The lower the value, the higher the chance  
the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets.The default value is 100.  
OSPF Intra (1-999)  
STATIC (1-999)  
Enter a value between 1 and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF Intra.The lower the value, the higher the  
chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets.The default value is 80.  
Enter a value between 1 and 999 to set the route preference for Static.The lower the value, the higher the  
chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets.The default value is 60.  
OSPF Inter (1-999)  
OSPF ExtT1 (1-999)  
OSPF ExtT2 (1-999)  
Enter a value between 1 and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF Inter.The lower the value, the higher the  
chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets.The default value is 90.  
Enter a value between 1 and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF ExtT1.The lower the value, the higher  
the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets.The default value is 110.  
Enter a value between 1 and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF ExtT2.The lower the value, the higher  
the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets.The default value is 115.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
Static ARP Table  
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is aTCP/IP protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses.This table allows network managers to view, define,  
modify and delete ARP information for specific devices.  
Static entries can be defined in the ARP Table.When static entries are defined, a permanent entry is entered and is used to translate IP address to MAC  
addresses.  
To open the Static ARP Table open the Configuration folder, and then open the Layer 3 IP Networking folder and click on the Static ARP  
Table link.  
Figure 6- 93. Static ARP Settings window  
To add a new entry, click the Add button, revealing the following screen to configure:  
Figure 6- 94. Static ARPTable – Add a New Entry window  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
IP Address  
The IP address of the ARP entry.  
MAC Address  
The MAC address of the ARP entry.  
After entering the IP Address and MAC Address of the Static ARP entry, click Apply to implement the new entry.To completely clear the Static ARP  
Settings, click the Clear All button.To delete an entry located in the Static ARP Settings window, click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete heading.  
RIP  
The Routing Information Protocol is a distance-vector routing protocol.There are two types of network devices running RIP – active and passive.Active devices  
advertise their routes to others through RIP messages, while passive devices listen to these messages. Both active and passive routers update their routing tables  
based upon RIP messages that active routers exchange. Only routers can run RIP in the active mode.  
Every 30 seconds, a router running RIP broadcasts a routing update containing a set of pairs of network addresses and a distance (represented by the number of  
hops or routers between the advertising router and the remote network). So, the vector is the network address and the distance is measured by the number of  
routers between the local router and the remote network.  
RIP measures distance by an integer count of the number of hops from one network to another.A router is one hop from a directly connected network, two  
hops from a network that can be reached through a router, etc.The more routers between a source and a destination, the greater the RIP distance (or hop  
count).  
There are a few rules to the routing table update process that help to improve performance and stability.A router will not replace a route with a newly learned  
one if the new route has the same hop count (sometimes referred to as ‘cost’). So learned routes are retained until a new route with a lower hop count is  
learned.  
When learned routes are entered into the routing table, a timer is started.This timer is restarted every time this route is advertised. If the route is not  
advertised for a period of time (usually 180 seconds), the route is removed from the routing table.  
RIP does not have an explicit method to detect routing loops. Many RIP implementations include an authorization mechanism (a password) to prevent a router  
from learning erroneous routes from unauthorized routers.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To maximize stability, the hop count RIP uses to measure distance must have a low maximum value. Infinity (that is, the network is unreachable) is defined as 16  
hops. In other words, if a network is more than 16 routers from the source, the local router will consider the network unreachable.  
RIP can also be slow to converge (to remove inconsistent, unreachable or looped routes from the routing table) because RIP messages propagate relatively  
slowly through a network.  
Slow convergence can be solved by using split horizon update, where a router does not propagate information about a route back to the interface on which it  
was received.This reduces the probability of forming transient routing loops.  
Hold down can be used to force a router to ignore new route updates for a period of time (usually 60 seconds) after a new route update has been received.This  
allows all routers on the network to receive the message.  
A router can ‘poison reverse’ a route by adding an infinite (16) hop count to a route’s advertisement.This is usually used in conjunction with triggered updates,  
which force a router to send an immediate broadcast when an update of an unreachable network is received.  
RIP Version 1 Message Format  
There are two types of RIP messages: routing information messages and information requests. Both types use the same format.  
The Command field specifies an operation according the following table:  
Command  
Meaning  
1
Request for partial or full routing information  
Response containing network-distance pairs from sender’s routing table  
Turn on trace mode (obsolete)  
2
3
4
Turn off trace mode (obsolete)  
5
Reserved for Sun Microsystem’s internal use  
Update Request  
9
10  
11  
Update Response  
Update Acknowledgement  
RIP Command Codes  
The fieldVersion contains the protocol version number (1 in this case), and is used by the receiver to verify which version of RIP the packet was sent.  
RIP 1 Message  
RIP is not limited toTCP/IP. Its address format can support up to 14 octets (when using IP, the remaining 10 octets must be zeros). Other network protocol  
suites can be specified in the Family of Source Network field (IP has a value of 2).This will determine how the address field is interpreted.  
RIP specifies that the IP address, 0.0.0.0, denotes a default route.  
The distances, measured in router hops are entered in the Distance to Source Network, and Distance to Destination Network fields.  
RIP 1 Route Interpretation  
RIP was designed to be used with classed address schemes, and does not include an explicit subnet mask. An extension to version 1 does allow routers to  
exchange subnetted addresses, but only if the subnet mask used by the network is the same as the subnet mask used by the address.This means the RIP version  
1 cannot be used to propagate classless addresses.  
Routers running RIP version 1 must send different update messages for each IP interface to which it is connected. Interfaces that use the same subnet mask as  
the router’s network can contain subnetted routes, other interfaces cannot.The router will then advertise only a single route to the network.  
RIP Version 2 Extensions  
RIP version 2 includes an explicit subnet mask entry, so RIP version 2 can be used to propagate variable length subnet addresses or CIDR classless addresses. RIP  
version 2 also adds an explicit next hop entry, which speeds convergence and helps prevent the formation of routing loops.  
RIP2 Message Format  
The message format used with RIP2 is an extension of the RIP1 format:  
RIP version 2 also adds a 16-bit route tag that is retained and sent with router updates. It can be used to identify the origin of the route.  
Because the version number in RIP2 occupies the same octet as in RIP1, both versions of the protocols can be used on a given router simultaneously without  
interference.  
RIP Configuration  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To setup RIP for the IP interfaces configured on the Switch, the user must enable RIP and then configure RIP settings for the individual IP interfaces.To globally  
enable RIP on the Switch, open the Configuration folder to Layer 3 Networking and then open the RIP folder and click on the RIP Configuration  
link to access the following screen:  
Figure 6- 95. RIP Global Setting window  
To enable RIP, simply use the pull down menu, select Enabled and click Apply.  
Setting Up RIP  
RIP settings are configured for each IP interface on the Switch. Click the RIP Interface Settings link in the RIP folder.The menu appears in table form listing  
settings for IP interfaces currently on the Switch.To configure RIP settings for an individual interface, click on the hyperlinked Interface Name.To view the  
next page of RIP Interface Settings, click the Next button.  
Figure 6- 96. RIP Interface Settings window  
Click the hyperlinked name of the interface you want to set up for RIP, which will give access to the following menu:  
Figure 6- 97. RIP Interface Settings – Edit window  
Refer to the table below for a description of the available parameters for RIP interface settings.  
The following RIP settings can be applied to each IP interface:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
The name of the IP interface on which RIP is to be setup.This interface must be previously configured on the  
Switch.  
IP Address  
The IP address corresponding to the Interface Name showing in the field above.  
TX Mode <Disabled>  
Toggle among Disabled, v1 Only, v1 Compatible, and v2 Only.This entry specifies which version of the RIP protocol  
will be used to transmit RIP packets. Disabled prevents the transmission of RIP packets.  
RX Mode <Disabled>  
Toggle among Disabled, v1 Only, v2 Only, and v1 or v2.This entry specifies which version of the RIP protocol will  
be used to interpret received RIP packets. Disabled prevents the reception of RIP packets.  
Authentication  
Toggle between Disabled and Enabled to specify that routers on the network should us the Password above to  
authenticate router table exchanges.  
Password  
State  
A password to be used to authenticate communication between routers on the network.  
Toggle between Disabled and Enabled to disable or enable this RIP interface on the switch.  
A read only field that denotes the Metric value of the current IP Interface setting.  
Interface Metric  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
OSPF  
The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol uses a link-state algorithm to determine routes to network destinations.A “link” is an interface on a  
router and the “state” is a description of that interface and its relationship to neighboring routers.The state contains information such as the IP address, subnet  
mask, type of network the interface is attached to, other routers attached to the network, etc.The collection of link-states is then collected in a link-state  
database that is maintained by routers running OSPF.  
OSPF specifies how routers will communicate to maintain their link-state database and defines several concepts about the topology of networks that use OSPF.  
To limit the extent of link-state update traffic between routers, OSPF defines the concept of Area.All routers within an area share the exact same link-state  
database, and a change to this database on one router triggers an update to the link-state database of all other routers in that area. Routers that have interfaces  
connected to more than one area are called Border Routers and take the responsibility of distributing routing information between areas.  
One area is defined as Area 0 or the Backbone.This area is central to the rest of the network in that all other areas have a connection (through a router) to the  
backbone. Only routers have connections to the backbone and OSPF is structured such that routing information changes in other areas will be introduced into  
the backbone, and then propagated to the rest of the network.  
When constructing a network to use OSPF, it is generally advisable to begin with the backbone (area 0) and work outward.  
Link-State Algorithm  
An OSPF router uses a link-state algorithm to build a shortest path tree to all destinations known to the router.The following is a simplified description of the  
algorithm’s steps:  
•
•
•
When OSPF is started, or when a change in the routing information changes, the router generates a link-state advertisement.This advertisement is a  
specially formatted packet that contains information about all the link-states on the router.  
This link-state advertisement is flooded to all router in the area. Each router that receives the link-state advertisement will store the advertisement  
and then forward a copy to other routers.  
When the link-state database of each router is updated, the individual routers will calculate a Shortest PathTree to all destinations - with the  
individual router as the root.The IP routing table will then be made up of the destination address, associated cost, and the address of the next hop to  
reach each destination.  
•
Once the link-state databases are updated, Shortest PathTrees calculated, and the IP routing tables written - if there are no subsequent changes in the  
OSPF network (such as a network link going down) there is very little OSPF traffic.  
Shortest Path Algorithm  
The Shortest Path to a destination is calculated using the Dijkstra algorithm. Each router is places at the root of a tree and then calculates the shortest path to  
each destination based on the cumulative cost to reach that destination over multiple possible routes. Each router will then have its own Shortest PathTree  
(from the perspective of its location in the network area) even though every router in the area will have and use the exact same link-state database.  
The following sections describe the information used to build the Shortest PathTree.  
OSPF Cost  
Each OSPF interface has an associated cost (also called “metric”) that is representative of the overhead required to send packets over that interface.This cost is  
inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface (i.e. a higher bandwidth interface has a lower cost).There is then a higher cost (and longer time delays)  
in sending packets over a 56 Kbps dial-up connection than over a 10Mbps Ethernet connection.The formula used to calculate the OSPF cost is as follows:  
Cost = 100,000,000 / bandwidth in bps  
As an example, the cost of a 10Mbps Ethernet line will be 10 and the cost to cross a 1.544MbpsT1 line will be 64.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shortest Path Tree  
To build Router A’s shortest path tree for the network diagrammed below, Router A is put at the root of the tree and the smallest cost link to each destination  
network is calculated.  
Router A  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
1
3
5
6
7
9
11  
12  
13  
15  
2
4
8
10  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
10  
128.213.0.0  
8
Router B  
9
11  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
1
3
5
6
7
2
4
8
10  
14  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
5
5
192.128.11.0  
10  
Router C  
13  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
34  
35  
36  
1
3
5
6
7
9
11  
12  
2
4
8
10  
14  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
10  
Router D  
9
11  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
1
3
5
6
7
2
4
8
10  
14  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
10  
222.211.10.0  
Router A  
0
10  
128.213.0.0  
10  
Router B  
5
Router C  
192.213.11.0  
5
Router D  
10  
10  
222.211.10.0  
Figure 6- 98. Constructing a Shortest PathTree  
The diagram above shows the network from the viewpoint of Router A. Router A can reach 192.213.11.0 through Router B with a cost of 10+5=15. Router A  
can reach 222.211.10.0 through Router C with a cost of 10+10=20. Router A can also reach 222.211.10.0 through Router B and Router D with a cost of  
10+5+10=25, but the cost is higher than the route through Router C.This higher-cost route will not be included in the Router A’s shortest path tree.The  
resulting tree will look like this:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Router A  
0
10  
128.213.0.0  
10  
Router B  
Router C  
5
10  
192.213.11.0  
222.211.10.0  
Figure 6- 99. Constructing a Shortest PathTree – Completed  
Note that this shortest path tree is only from the viewpoint of Router A.The cost of the link from Router B to Router A, for instance is not important to  
constructing Router A’s shortest path tree, but is very important when Router B is constructing its shortest path tree.  
Note also that directly connected networks are reached at a cost of 0, while other networks are reached at the cost calculated in the shortest path tree.  
Router A can now build its routing table using the network addresses and costs calculated in building the above shortest path tree.  
Areas and Border Routers  
OSPF link-state updates are forwarded to other routers by flooding to all routers on the network. OSPF uses the concept of areas to define where on the  
network routers that need to receive particular link-state updates are located.This helps ensure that routing updates are not flooded throughout the entire  
network and to reduce the amount of bandwidth consumed by updating the various router’s routing tables.  
Areas establish boundaries beyond which link-state updates do not need to be flooded. So the exchange of link-state updates and the calculation of the shortest  
path tree are limited to the area that the router is connected to.  
Routers that have connections to more than one area are called Border Routers (BR).The Border Routers have the responsibility of distributing necessary  
routing information and changes between areas.  
Areas are specific to the router interface.A router that has all of its interfaces in the same area is called an Internal Router.A router that has interfaces in  
multiple areas is called a Border Router. Routers that act as gateways to other networks (possibly using other routing protocols) are called Autonomous System  
Border Routers (ASBRs).  
Link-State Packets  
There are a number of different types of link-state packets, four of which are illustrated below:  
•
•
•
Router Link-State Updates –These describe a router’s links to destinations within an area.  
Summary Link-State Updates – Issued by Border Routers and describe links to networks outside the area but within the Autonomous System (AS).  
Network Link-State Updates – Issued by multi-access areas that have more than one attached router. One router is elected as the Designated Router  
(DR) and this router issues the network link-state updates describing every router on the segment.  
•
External Link-State Updates – Issued by an Autonomous System Border Router and describes routes to destinations outside the AS or a default route  
to the outside AS.  
The format of these link-state updates is described in more detail below.  
Router link-state updates are flooded to all routers in the current area.These updates describe the destinations reachable through all of the router’s interfaces.  
Summary link-state updates are generated by Border Routers to distribute routing information about other networks within the AS. Normally, all Summary link-  
state updates are forwarded to the backbone (area 0) and are then forwarded to all other areas in the network. Border Routers also have the responsibility of  
distributing routing information from the Autonomous System Border Router in order for routers in the network to get and maintain routes to other  
Autonomous Systems.  
Network link-state updates are generated by a router elected as the Designated Router on a multi-access segment (with more than one attached router).These  
updates describe all of the routers on the segment and their network connections.  
External link-state updates carry routing information to networks outside the Autonomous System.The Autonomous System Border Router is responsible for  
generating and distributing these updates.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Authentication  
OSPF packets can be authenticated as coming from trusted routers by the use of predefined passwords.The default for routers is to use not authentication.  
There are two other authentication methods – simple password authentication (key) and Message Digest authentication (MD-5).  
Message Digest Authentication (MD-5)  
MD-5 authentication is a cryptographic method.A key and a key-ID are configured on each router.The router then uses an algorithm to generate a mathematical  
“message digest” that is derived from the OSPF packet, the key and the key-ID.This message digest (a number) is then appended to the packet.The key is not  
exchanged over the wire and a non-decreasing sequence number is included to prevent replay attacks.  
Simple Password Authentication  
A password (or key) can be configured on a per-area basis. Routers in the same area that participate in the routing domain must be configured with the same key.  
This method is possibly vulnerable to passive attacks where a link analyzer is used to obtain the password.  
Backbone and Area 0  
OSPF limits the number of link-state updates required between routers by defining areas within which a given router operates.When more than one area is  
configured, one area is designated as area 0 – also called the backbone.  
The backbone is at the center of all other areas – all areas of the network have a physical (or virtual) connection to the backbone through a router. OSPF allows  
routing information to be distributed by forwarding it into area 0, from which the information can be forwarded to all other areas (and all other routers) on the  
network.  
In situations where an area is required, but is not possible to provide a physical connection to the backbone, a virtual link can be configured.  
Virtual Links  
Virtual links accomplish two purposes:  
•
•
Linking an area that does not have a physical connection to the backbone.  
Patching the backbone in case there is a discontinuity in area 0.  
Areas Not Physically Connected to Area 0  
All areas of an OSPF network should have a physical connection to the backbone, but is some cases it is not possible to physically connect a remote area to the  
backbone. In these cases, a virtual link is configured to connect the remote area to the backbone.A virtual path is a logical path between two border routers that  
have a common area, with one border router connected to the backbone.  
Partitioning the Backbone  
OSPF also allows virtual links to be configured to connect the parts of the backbone that are discontinuous.This is the equivalent to linking different area 0s  
together using a logical path between each area 0.Virtual links can also be added for redundancy to protect against a router failure.A virtual link is configured  
between two border routers that both have a connection to their respective area 0s.  
Neighbors  
Routers that are connected to the same area or segment become neighbors in that area. Neighbors are elected via the Hello protocol. IP multicast is used to  
send out Hello packets to other routers on the segment. Routers become neighbors when they see themselves listed in a Hello packet sent by another router  
on the same segment. In this way, two-way communication is guaranteed to be possible between any two neighbor routers.  
Any two routers must meet the following conditions before the become neighbors:  
•
•
•
Area ID –Two routers having a common segment – their interfaces have to belong to the same area on that segment. Of course, the interfaces  
should belong to the same subnet and have the same subnet mask.  
Authentication – OSPF allows for the configuration of a password for a specific area.Two routers on the same segment and belonging to the  
same area must also have the same OSPF password before they can become neighbors.  
Hello and Dead Intervals –The Hello interval specifies the length of time, in seconds, between the hello packets that a router sends on an OSPF  
interface.The dead interval is the number of seconds that a router’s Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF router  
down. OSPF routers exchange Hello packets on each segment in order to acknowledge each other’s existence on a segment and to elect a  
Designated Router on multi-access segments. OSPF requires these intervals to be exactly the same between any two neighbors. If any of these  
intervals are different, these routers will not become neighbors on a particular segment.  
•
Stub Area Flag – Any two routers also have to have the same stub area flag in their Hello packets in order to become neighbors.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
Adjacencies  
Adjacent routers go beyond the simple Hello exchange and participate in the link-state database exchange process. OSPF elects one router as the Designated  
Router (DR) and a second router as the Backup Designated Router (BDR) on each multi-access segment (the BDR is a backup in case of a DR failure).All other  
routers on the segment will then contact the DR for link-state database updates and exchanges.This limits the bandwidth required for link-state database  
updates.  
Designated Router Election  
The election of the DR and BDR is accomplished using the Hello protocol.The router with the highest OSPF priority on a given multi-access segment will  
become the DR for that segment. In case of a tie, the router with the highest Router ID wins.The default OSPF priority is 1.A priority of zero indicates a router  
that cannot be elected as the DR.  
Building Adjacency  
Two routers undergo a multi-step process in building the adjacency relationship.The following is a simplified description of the steps required:  
•
•
Down – No information has been received from any router on the segment.  
Attempt – On non-broadcast multi-access networks (such as Frame Relay or X.25), this state indicates that no recent information has been  
received from the neighbor.An effort should be made to contact the neighbor by sending Hello packets at the reduced rate set by the Poll Interval.  
•
•
Init –The interface has detected a Hello packet coming from a neighbor but bi-directional communication has not yet been established.  
Two-way – Bi-directional communication with a neighbor has been established.The router has seen its address in the Hello packets coming from a  
neighbor.At the end of this stage the DR and BDR election would have been done.At the end of theTwo-way stage, routers will decide whether to  
proceed in building an adjacency or not.The decision is based on whether one of the routers is a DR or a BDR or the link is a point-to-point or  
virtual link.  
•
Exstart – (Exchange Start) Routers establish the initial sequence number that is going to be used in the information exchange packets.The sequence  
number insures that routers always get the most recent information. One router will become the primary and the other will become secondary.The  
primary router will poll the secondary for information.  
•
•
Exchange – Routers will describe their entire link-state database by sending database description packets.  
Loading –The routers are finalizing the information exchange. Routers have link-state request list and a link-state retransmission list.Any  
information that looks incomplete or outdated will be put on the request list.Any update that is sent will be put on the retransmission list until it gets  
acknowledged.  
•
Full –The adjacency is now complete.The neighboring routers are fully adjacent.Adjacent routers will have the same link-state database.  
Adjacencies on Point-to-Point Interfaces  
OSPF Routers that are linked using point-to-point interfaces (such as serial links) will always form adjacencies.The concepts of DR and BDR are unnecessary.  
OSPF Packet Formats  
All OSPF packet types begin with a standard 24-byte header and there are five packet types.The header is described first, and each packet type is described in a  
subsequent section.  
All OSPF packets (except for Hello packets) forward link-state advertisements. Link-State Update packets, for example, flood advertisements throughout the  
OSPF routing domain.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
OSPF packet header  
Hello packet  
Database Description packet  
Link-State Request packet  
Link-State Update packet  
Link-State Acknowledgment packet  
OSPF Packet Header  
Every OSPF packet is preceded by a common 24-byte header.This header contains the information necessary for a receiving router to determine if the packet  
should be accepted for further processing.  
The format of the OSPP packet header is shown below:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Packet Header  
Octets  
0
4
1
2
3
Version No.  
Type  
Packet Length  
Router ID  
Area ID  
Checksum  
AuthenticationType  
Authentication  
Authentication  
Figure 6- 100. OSPF Packet Header Format  
Field  
Description  
The OSPF version number.  
Version No.  
Type  
The OSPF packet type.The OSPF packet types are as follows:Type Description Hello Database Description  
Link-State Request Link-State Update Link-State Acknowledgment.  
Packet Length  
Router ID  
Area ID  
The length of the packet in bytes.This length includes the 24-byte header.  
The Router ID of the packet’s source.  
A 32-bit number identifying the area that this packet belongs to.All OSPF packets are associated with a single  
area. Packets traversing a virtual link are assigned the backbone Area ID of 0.0.0.0  
Checksum  
A standard IP checksum that includes all of the packet’s contents except for the 64-bit authentication field.  
The type of authentication to be used for the packet.  
Authentication Type  
Authentication  
A 64-bit field used by the authentication scheme.  
Hello Packet  
Hello packets are OSPF packet type 1.They are sent periodically on all interfaces, including virtual links, in order to establish and maintain neighbor relationships.  
In addition, Hello Packets are multicast on those physical networks having a multicast or broadcast capability, enabling dynamic discovery of neighboring routers.  
All routers connected to a common network must agree on certain parameters such as the Network Mask, the Hello Interval, and the Router Dead Interval.  
These parameters are included in hello packets, so that differences can inhibit the forming of neighbor relationships.A detailed explanation of the receive  
processing for Hello packets, so that differences can inhibit the forming of neighbor relationships.  
The format of the Hello packet is shown below:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Hello Packet  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Version No.  
1
Packet Length  
Router ID  
Area ID  
Checksum  
AuthenticationType  
Authentication  
Authentication  
Network Mask  
Hello Interval  
Options  
Router Priority  
Router Dead Interval  
Designated Router  
Backup Designated Router  
Neighbour  
Figure 6- 101. Hello Packet  
Field  
Description  
Network Mask  
Options  
The network mask associated with this interface.  
The optional capabilities supported by the router.  
Hello Interval  
Router Priority  
The number of seconds between this router’s Hello packets.  
This router’s Router Priority.The Router Priority is used in the election of the DR and BDR. If this field is set  
to 0, the router is ineligible become the DR or the BDR.  
Router Dead Interval  
Designated Router  
The number of seconds that must pass before declaring a silent router as down.  
The identity of the DR for this network, in the view of the advertising router.The DR is identified here by its IP  
interface address on the network.  
Backup Designated Router  
Neighbor  
The identity of the Backup Designated Router (BDR) for this network.The BDR is identified here by its IP  
interface address on the network.This field is set to 0.0.0.0 if there is no BDR.  
The Router IDs of each router from whom valid Hello packets have been seen within the Router Dead Interval  
on the network.  
Database Description Packet  
Database Description packets are OSPF packet type 2.These packets are exchanged when an adjacency is being initialized.They describe the contents of the  
topological database. Multiple packets may be used to describe the database. For this purpose a poll-response procedure is used. One of the routers is designated  
to be master, the other a slave.The master seconds Database Description packets (polls) that are acknowledged by Database Description packets sent by the  
slave (responses).The responses are linked to the polls via the packets’ DD sequence numbers.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Database Description Packet  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Version No.  
2
Packet Length  
Router ID  
Area ID  
Checksum  
Authentication Type  
Authentication  
Authentication  
Reserved  
I
M MS  
Reserved  
DD Sequence No.  
Options  
Link-State Advertisement Header  
Figure 6- 102. Database Description Packet  
Field  
Description  
Options  
I – bit  
The optional capabilities supported by the router.  
The Initial bit.When set to 1, this packet is the first in the sequence of Database Description packets.  
The More bit.When set to 1, this indicates that more Database Description packets will follow.  
M – bit  
MS – bit  
The Master Slave bit.When set to 1, this indicates that the router is the master during the Database Exchange  
process.A zero indicates the opposite.  
DD Sequence Number  
User to sequence the collection of Database Description Packets.The initial value (indicated by the Initial bit  
being set) should be unique.The DD sequence number then increments until the complete database  
description has been sent.  
The rest of the packet consists of a list of the topological database’s pieces. Each link state advertisement in the database is described by its link state  
advertisement header.  
Link-State Request Packet  
Link-State Request packets are OSPF packet type 3.After exchanging Database Description packets with a neighboring router, a router may find that parts of its  
topological database are out of date.The Link-State Request packet is used to request the pieces of the neighbor’s database that are more up to date. Multiple  
Link-State Request packets may need to be used.The sending of Link-State Request packets is the last step in bringing up an adjacency.  
A router that sends a Link-State Request packet has in mind the precise instance of the database pieces it is requesting, defined by LS sequence number, LS  
checksum, and LS age, although these fields are not specified in the Link-State Request packet itself.The router may receive even more recent instances in  
response.  
The format of the Link-State Request packet is shown below:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Link-State Request Packet  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Version No.  
3
Packet Length  
Router ID  
Area ID  
Checksum  
Authentication Type  
Authentication  
Authentication  
Link-State Type  
Link-State ID  
Advertising Router  
Figure 6- 103. Link-State Request Packet  
Each advertisement requested is specified by its Link-StateType, Link-State ID, and Advertising Router.This uniquely identifies the advertisement, but not its  
instance. Link-State Request packets are understood to be requests for the most recent instance.  
Link-State Update Packet  
Link-State Update packets are OSPF packet type 4.These packets implement the flooding of link-state advertisements. Each Link-State Update packet carries a  
collection of link-state advertisements one hop further from its origin. Several link-state advertisements may be included in a single packet.  
Link-State Update packets are multicast on those physical networks that support multicast/broadcast. In order to make the flooding procedure reliable, flooded  
advertisements are acknowledged in Link-State Acknowledgment packets. If retransmission of certain advertisements is necessary, the retransmitted  
advertisements are always carried by unicast Link-State Update packets.  
The format of the Link-State Update packet is shown below:  
OSPF Link-State Update Packet  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Version No.  
4
Packet Length  
Router ID  
Area ID  
Checksum  
Authentication Type  
Authentication  
Authentication  
Number of Advertisements  
Link-State Advertisements  
Figure 6- 104. Link-State Update Packet  
The body of the Link-State Update packet consists of a list of link-state advertisements. Each advertisement begins with a common 20-byte header, the link-state  
advertisement header. Otherwise, the format of each of the five types of link-state advertisements is different.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Link-State Acknowledgment Packet  
Link-State Acknowledgment packets are OSPF packet type 5.To make the folding of link-state advertisements reliable, flooded advertisements are explicitly  
acknowledged.This acknowledgment is accomplished through the sending and receiving of Link-State Acknowledgment packets. Multiple link-state advertisements  
can be acknowledged in a single Link-State Acknowledgment packet. Depending on the state of the sending interface and the source of the advertisements being  
acknowledged, a Link-State Acknowledgment packet is sent either to the multicast address AllSPFRouters, to the multicast address AllDRouters, or as a unicast  
packet.  
The format of this packet is similar to that of the Data Description packet.The body of both packets is simply a list of link-state advertisement headers.  
The format of the Link-State Acknowledgment packet is shown below:  
OSPF Link-State Acknowledgement Packet  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Version No.  
5
Packet Length  
Router ID  
Area ID  
Checksum  
Authentication Type  
Authentication  
Authentication  
Link-State Advertisement Header  
Figure 6- 105. Link State Acknowledge Packet  
Each acknowledged link-state advertisement is described by its link-state advertisement header. It contains all the information required to uniquely identify both  
the advertisement and the advertisement’s current instance.  
Link-State Advertisement Formats  
There are five distinct types of link-state advertisements. Each link-state advertisement begins with a standard 20-byte link-state advertisement header.  
Succeeding sections then diagram the separate link-state advertisement types.  
Each link-state advertisement describes a piece of the OSPF routing domain. Every router originates a router links advertisement. In addition, whenever the  
router is elected as the Designated Router, it originates a network links advertisement. Other types of link-state advertisements may also be originated.The  
flooding algorithm is reliable, ensuring that all routers have the same collection of link-state advertisements.The collection of advertisements is called the link-  
state (or topological) database.  
From the link-state database, each router constructs a shortest path tree with itself as root.This yields a routing table.  
There are four types of link state advertisements, each using a common link state header.These are:  
•
•
•
•
Router Links Advertisements  
Network Links Advertisements  
Summary Link Advertisements  
Autonomous System Link Advertisements  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
Link State Advertisement Header  
All link state advertisements begin with a common 20-byte header.This header contains enough information to uniquely identify the advertisements (Link State  
Type, Link State ID, and Advertising Router). Multiple instances of the link state advertisement may exist in the routing domain at the same time. It is then  
necessary to determine which instance is more recent.This is accomplished by examining the link state age, link state sequence number and link state checksum  
fields that are also contained in the link state advertisement header.  
The format of the Link State Advertisement Header is shown below:  
OSPF Link-State Advertisement Header  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Link State Age  
Options  
Link-State Type  
Link-State ID  
Advertising Router  
Link-State Sequence Number  
Link-State Checksum  
Length  
Figure 6- 106. Link State Advertisement Header  
Field  
Description  
Link State Age  
Options  
The time is seconds since the link state advertisement was originated.  
The optional capabilities supported by the described portion of the routing domain.  
Link State Type  
The type of the link state advertisement. Each link state type has a separate advertisement format.  
The link state type are as follows: Router Links, Network Links, Summary Link (IP Network), Summary Link  
(ASBR),AS External Link.  
Link State ID  
This field identifies the portion of the internet environment that is being described by the advertisement.The  
contents of this field depend on the advertisement’s Link StateType.  
Advertising Router  
The Router ID of the router that originated the Link State Advertisement. For example, in network links  
advertisements this field is set to the Router ID of the network’s Designated Router.  
Link State Sequence Number Detects old or duplicate link state advertisements. Successive instances of a link state advertisement are given  
successive Link State Sequence numbers.  
Link State Checksum  
Length  
The Fletcher checksum of the complete contents of the link state advertisement, including the link state  
advertisement header by accepting the Link State Age field.  
The length in bytes of the link state advertisement.This includes the 20-byte link state advertisement header.  
Router Links Advertisements  
Router links advertisements are type 1 link state advertisements. Each router in an area originates a routers links advertisement.The advertisement describes the  
state and cost of the router’s links to the area.All of the router’s links to the area must be described in a single router links advertisement.  
The format of the Router Links Advertisement is shown below:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Router Links Advertisements  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Link-State Age  
Options  
Link-State Type  
Link-State ID  
Advertising Router  
Link-State Sequence Number  
Link-State Checksum  
Length  
Reserved  
V
E
B
Reserved  
Number of Links  
Link-ID  
Link Data  
Type  
No. of TOS  
0
TOS 0 Metric  
Metric  
TOS  
...  
TOS  
0
Metric  
...  
Link-ID  
Link Data  
Figure 6- 107. Routers Links Advertisements  
In router links advertisements, the Link State ID field is set to the router’s OSPF Router ID.TheT-bit is set in the advertisement’s Option field if and only if the  
router is able to calculate a separate set of routes for each IPType of Service (TOS). Router links advertisements are flooded throughout a single area only.  
Field  
Description  
V – bit  
When set, the router is an endpoint of an active virtual link that is using the described area as aTransit area (V  
is forVirtual link endpoint).  
E – bit  
When set, the router is an Autonomous System (AS) boundary router (E is for External).  
When set, the router is an area border router (B is for Border).  
B – bit  
Number of Links  
The number of router links described by this advertisement.This must be the total collection of router links to  
the area.  
The following fields are used to describe each router link. Each router link is typed.TheType field indicates the kind of link being described. It may be a link to a  
transit network, to another router or to a stub network.The values of all the other fields describing a router link depend on the link’sType. For example, each  
link has an associated 32-bit data field. For links to stub networks this field specifies the network’s IP address mask. For other link types the Link Data specifies  
the router’s associated IP interface address.  
Field  
Type  
Description  
A quick classification of the router link. One of the following:Type Description Point-to-point connection to  
another router. Connection to a transit network. Connection to a stub network.Virtual link.  
Link ID  
Identifies the object that this router link connects to.Value depends on the link’sType.When connecting to an  
object that also originates a link state advertisement (i.e. another router or a transit network) the Link ID is  
equal to the neighboring advertisement’s Link State ID.This provides the key for looking up an advertisement in  
the link state database.Type Link ID Neighboring router’s Router ID. IP address of Designated Router. IP  
network/subnet number. Neighboring router’s Router ID.  
Link Data  
Contents again depend on the link’sType field. For connections to stub networks, it specifies the network’s IP  
address mask. For unnumbered point-to-point connection, it specifies the interface’s MIB-II ifIndex value. For  
other link types it specifies the router’s associated IP interface address.This latter piece of information is  
needed during the routing table build process, when calculating the IP address of the next hop.  
No. of TOS  
The number of differentType of Service (TOS) metrics given for this link, not counting the required metric for  
TOS 0. If no additionalTOS metrics are given, this field should be set to 0.  
TOS 0 Metric  
The cost of using this router link forTOS 0.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
For each link, separate metrics may be specified for eachType of Service (TOS).The metric forTOS 0 must always be included, and was discussed above. Metrics  
for non-zeroTOS are described below. Note that the cost for non-zeroTOS values that are not specified defaults to theTOS 0 cost. Metrics must be listed in  
order of increasingTOS encoding. For example, the metric forTOS 16 must always follow the metric forTOS 8 when both are specified.  
Field  
Description  
TOS  
IPType of Service that this metric refers to.  
Metric  
The cost of using this outbound router link, for traffic of the specifiedTOS.  
Network Links Advertisements  
Network links advertisements areType 2 link state advertisements.A network links advertisement is originated for each transit network in the area.A transit  
network is a multi-access network that has more than one attached router.The network links advertisement is originated by the network’s Designated router.  
The advertisement describes all routers attached to the network, including the Designated Router itself.The advertisement’s Link State ID field lists the IP  
interface address of the Designated Router.  
The distance form the network to all attached routers is zero, for allTOS.This is why theTOS and metric fields need not be specified in the network links  
advertisement.  
The format of the Network Links Advertisement is shown below:  
Network Link Advertisements  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Link State Age  
Options  
2
Link-State ID  
Advertising Router  
Link-State Sequence Number  
Link-State Checksum  
Length  
Network Mask  
Attached Router  
Figure 6- 108. Network Link Advertisements  
Field  
Description  
The IP address mask for the network.  
Network Mask  
Attached Router  
The Router Ids of each of the routers attached to the network. Only those routers that are fully adjacent to  
the Designated Router (DR) are listed.The DR includes itself in this list.  
Summary Link Advertisements  
Summary link advertisements areType 3 and 4 link state advertisements.These advertisements are originated by Area Border routers.A separate summary link  
advertisement is made for each destination known to the router, that belongs to the Autonomous System (AS), yet is outside the area.  
Type 3 link state advertisements are used when the destination is an IP network. In this case, the advertisement’s Link State ID field is an IP network number.  
When the destination is an AS boundary router, aType 4 advertisement is used, and the Link State ID field is the AS boundary router’s OSPF Router ID. Other  
that the difference in the Link State ID field, the format ofType 3 and 4 link state advertisements is identical.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Summary Link Advertisements  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Link-State Age  
Options  
2
Link-State ID  
Advertising Router  
Link-State Sequence Number  
Link-State Checksum  
Length  
Network Mask  
Metric  
TOS  
Figure 6- 109. Summary Link Advertisements  
For stub area,Type 3 summary link advertisements can also be used to describe a default route on a per-area basis. Default summary routes are used in stub area  
instead of flooding a complete set of external routes.When describing a default summary route, the advertisement’s Link State ID is always set to the Default  
Destination – 0.0.0.0, and the Network Mask is set to 0.0.0.0.  
Separate costs may be advertised for each IPType of Service. Note that the cost forTOS 0 must be included, and is always listed first. If theT-bit is reset in the  
advertisement’s Option field, only a route forTOS 0 is described by the advertisement. Otherwise, routes for the otherTOS values are also described. If a cost  
for a certainTOS is not included, its cost defaults to that specified forTOS 0.  
Field  
Description  
Network Mask  
ForType 3 link state advertisements, this indicates the destination network’s IP address mask. For example,  
when advertising the location of a class A network the value 0xff000000  
TOS  
TheType of Service that the following cost is relevant to.  
Metric  
The cost of this route. Expressed in the same units as the interface costs in the router links advertisements.  
Autonomous Systems External Link Advertisements  
Autonomous Systems (AS) link advertisements areType 5 link state advertisements.These advertisements are originated by AS boundary routers.A separate  
advertisement is made for each destination known to the router that is external to the AS.  
AS external link advertisements usually describe a particular external destination. For these advertisements the Link State ID field specifies an IP network  
number.AS external link advertisements are also used to describe a default route. Default routes are used when no specific route exists to the destination.When  
describing a default route, the Link Stat ID is always set the Default Destination address (0.0.0.0) and the Network Mask is set to 0.0.0.0.  
The format of the AS External Link Advertisement is shown below:  
AS External Link Advertisements  
Octets  
0
1
2
3
4
Link-State Age  
Options  
5
Link-State ID  
Advertising Router  
Link-State Sequence Number  
Link-State Checksum  
Length  
E
TOS  
Metric  
Forwarding Address  
External Route Tag  
Figure 6- 110.AS External Link Advertisements  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
Field  
Description  
Network Mask  
E – bit  
The IP address mask for the advertised destination.  
The type of external metric. If the E - bit is set, the metric specified is aType 2 external metric.This means the  
metric is considered larger than any link state path. If the E - bit is zero, the specified metric is aType 1 external  
metric.This means that is comparable directly to the link state metric.  
Forwarding Address  
Data traffic for the advertised destination will be forwarded to this address. If the Forwarding Address is set to  
0.0.0.0, data traffic will be forwarded instead to the advertisement’s originator.  
TOS  
TheType of Service that the following cost is relevant to.  
Metric  
The cost of this route.The interpretation of this metric depends on the external type indication (the E - bit  
above).  
External Route Tag  
A 32-bit field attached to each external route.This is not used by the OSPF protocol itself.  
General OSPF Settings  
The OSPF General Setting menu allows OSPF to be enabled or disabled on the Switch – without changing the Switch’s OSPF configuration.  
From the Layer 3 IP Networking folder, open the OSPF folder and click on the OSPF General Setting link.To enable OSPF, first supply an OSPF Route ID (see  
below), select Enabled from the State drop-down menu and click the Apply button.  
Figure 6- 111. OSPF Global Settings window  
The following parameters are used for general OSPF configuration:  
Parameter  
Description  
OSPF Route ID  
A 32-bit number (in the same format as an IP address – xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the Switch in  
the OSPF domain. It is common to assign the highest IP address assigned to the Switch (router). In this case, it  
would be 10.53.13.189, but any unique 32-bit number will do. If 0.0.0.0 is entered, the highest IP address  
assigned to the Switch will become the OSPF Route ID.  
Current Route ID  
State  
Displays the OSPF Route ID currently in use by the Switch.This Route ID is displayed as a convenience to the  
user when changing the Switch’s OSPF Route ID.  
Allows OSPF to be enabled or disabled globally on the Switch without changing the OSPF configuration.  
OSPF Area ID Setting  
This menu allows the configuration of OSPF Area IDs and to designate these areas as either Normal or Stub. Normal OSPF areas allow Link-State Database  
(LSDB) advertisements of routes to networks that are external to the area. Stub areas do not allow the LSDB advertisement of external routes. Stub areas use a  
default summary external route (0.0.0.0 or Area 0) to reach external destinations.  
To set up an OSPF Area configuration click Configuration > Layer 3 IP Networking > OSPF > OSPF Area ID Settings link to open the following  
dialog box:  
Figure 6- 112. OSPF Area ID Settings andTable window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To add an OSPF Area to the table, type a unique Area ID (see below) select the Type from the drop-down menu. For a Stub type, choose Enabled or Disabled  
from the Stub Import Summary LSA drop-down menu and determine the Stub Default Cost. Click the Add/Modify button to add the Area ID  
set to the table.  
To remove an Area ID configuration set, simply click ꢀ in the Delete column for the configuration.  
To change an existing set in the list, type the Area ID of the set you want to change, make the changes and click the Add/Modify button.The modified OSPF  
Area ID will appear in the table.  
Figure 6- 113. OSPF Area Setting Example window  
See the parameter descriptions below for information on the OSPF Area ID Settings.  
The Area ID settings are as follows:  
Parameter  
Area ID  
Description  
A 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the  
OSPF domain.  
Type  
This field can be toggled between Normal and Stub using the space bar.When it is toggled to Stub, additional  
fields appear •Stub Import Summary LSA, and Default Cost.  
Stub Import Summary LSA  
Stub Default Cost  
Displays whether or not the selected Area will allow Summary Link-State Advertisements (Summary LSAs) to  
be imported into the area from other areas.  
Displays the default cost for the route to the stub of between 0 and 65,535.The default is 1.  
OSPF Interface Settings  
To set up OSPF interfaces, click Configuration > Layer 3 IP Networking > OSPF > OSPF Interface Settings to view OSPF settings for existing IP  
interfaces. If there are no IP interfaces configured (besides the default System interface), only the System interface settings will appear listed.To change settings  
for in IP interface, click on the hyperlinked name of the interface to see the configuration menu for that interface.  
Figure 6- 114. OSPF Interface Settings window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 115. OSPF Interface Settings – Edit window  
Configure each IP interface individually using the OSPF Interface Settings – Edit menu. Click the Apply button when you have entered the settings.The  
new configuration appears listed in the OSPF Interface Settings table.To return to the OSPF Interface Settings table, click the Show All OSPF  
Interface Entries link.  
OSPF interface settings are described below. Some OSPF interface settings require previously configured OSPF settings. Read the descriptions below for details.  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
Area ID  
Displays the of an IP interface previously configured on the Switch.  
Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID configured above.  
Router Priority (0-255)  
Allows the entry of a number between 0 and 255 representing the OSPF priority of the selected area. If a  
Router Priority of 0 is selected, the Switch cannot be elected as the Designated Router for the network.  
Hello Interval (1-65535)  
Dead Interval (1-65535)  
Allows the specification of the interval between the transmission of OSPF Hello packets, in seconds. Between 1  
and 65535 seconds can be specified.The Hello Interval, Dead Interval,AuthorizationType, and Authorization  
Key should be the same for all routers on the same network.  
Allows the specification of the length of time between the receipt of Hello packets from a neighbor router  
before the selected area declares that router down.An interval between 1 and 65535 seconds can be specified.  
The Dead Interval must be evenly divisible by the Hello Interval.  
State  
Allows the OSPF interface to be disabled for the selected area without changing the configuration for that area.  
Auth Type  
This field can be toggled between None, Simple, and MD5 using the space bar.This allows a choice of  
authorization schemes for OSPF packets that may be exchanged over the OSPF routing domain. None specifies  
no authorization. Simple uses a simple password to determine if the packets are from an authorized OSPF  
router.When Simple is selected, the Auth Key field allows the entry of a 8 character password that must be the  
same as a password configured on a neighbor OSPF router. MD5 uses a cryptographic key entered in the MD5  
KeyTable Configuration menu.When MD5 is selected, the Auth Key ID field allows the specification of the Key  
ID as defined in the MD5 configuration above.This must be the same MD5 Key as used by the neighboring  
router.  
Auth. Key ID  
Metric (1-65535)  
DR State  
Enter a Key ID of up to 5 characters to set the Auth. Key ID for either the Simple AuthType or the MD5 Auth  
Type, as specified in the previous parameter.  
This field allows the entry of a number between 1 and 65,535 that is representative of the OSPF cost of  
reaching the selected OSPF interface.The default metric is 1.  
A read only field describing the Designated Router state of the IP interface.This field many read DR if the  
interface is the designated router, or Backup DR if the interface is the Backup Designated Router.The highest IP  
address will be the Designated Router and is determined by the OSPF Hello Protocol of the Switch.  
DR Address  
The IP address of the aforementioned Designated Router.  
Backup DR Address  
Transmit Delay  
The IP address of the aforementioned Backup Designated Router.  
A read only field that denotes the estimated time to transmit a Link State Update Packet over this interface, in  
seconds.  
Retransmit Time  
A read only field that denotes the time between LSA retransmissions over this interface, in seconds.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
OSPF Virtual Interface Settings  
Click the OSPF Virtual Interface Settings link to view the current OSPF Virtual Interface Settings.There are not virtual interface settings  
configured by default, so the first time this table is viewed there will be not interfaces listed.To add a new OSPF virtual interface configuration set to the table,  
click the Add button.A new menu appears (see below).To change an existing configuration, click on the hyperlinkedTransit Area ID for the set you want to  
change.The menu to modify an existing set is the same as the menu used to add a new one.To eliminate an existing configuration, click the ꢀ in the Delete  
column.  
Figure 6- 116. OSPFVirtual Interface Settings window  
The status of the virtual interface appears (Up or Down) in the Status column.  
Figure 6- 117. OSPFVirtual Link Setting – Add  
Configure the following parameters if you are adding or changing an OSPF Virtual Interface:  
Parameter  
Description  
Transit Area ID  
Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID – previously defined on the Switch – that allows a remote area to  
communicate with the backbone (area 0).ATransit Area cannot be a Stub Area or a Backbone Area.  
Neighbor Router  
The OSPF router ID for the remote router.This is a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address  
(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the remote area’s Area Border Router.  
Hello Interval (1-65535)  
Specify the interval between the transmission of OSPF Hello packets, in seconds. Enter a value between 1 and  
65535 seconds.The Hello Interval, Dead Interval,AuthorizationType, and Authorization Key should have  
identical settings for all routers on the same network.  
Dead Interval (1-65535)  
Auth Type  
Specify the length of time between (receiving) Hello packets from a neighbor router before the selected area  
declares that router down.Again, all routers on the network should use the same setting.  
If using authorization for OSPF routers, select the type being used. MD5 key authorization must be set up in  
the MD5 Key Settings menu.  
Password/Auth. Key ID  
Transmit Delay  
Enter a case-sensitive password for simple authorization or enter the MD5 key you set in the MD5 Key settings  
menu.  
The number of seconds required to transmit a link state update over this virtual link.Transit delay takes into  
account transmission and propagation delays.This field is fixed at 1 second.  
RetransInterval  
The number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this  
virtual link.This field is fixed at 5 seconds.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Note:  
For OSPF to function properly some settings should be identical on all participating OSPF devices.These settings include the Hello Interval  
and Dead Interval. For networks using authorization for OSPF devices, the AuthorizationType and Password or Key used must likewise be identical.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSPF Area Aggregation Settings  
Area Aggregation allows all of the routing information that may be contained within an area to be aggregated into a summary LSDB advertisement of just the  
network address and subnet mask.This allows for a reduction in the volume of LSDB advertisement traffic as well as a reduction in the memory overhead in the  
Switch used to maintain routing tables.  
Click the OSPF Area Aggregation Settings link to view the current settings.There are no aggregation settings configured by default, so there will not be  
any listed the first accessing the menu.To add a new OSPF Area Aggregation setting, click the Add button.A new menu (pictured below) appears.To  
change an existing configuration, click on the hyperlinked Area ID for the set you want to change.The menu to modify an existing configuration is the same as the  
menu used to add a new one.To eliminate an existing configuration, click the ꢀ in the Delete column for the configuration being removed.  
Figure 6- 118. OSPF Area Aggregation Settings window  
Use the menu below to change settings or add a new OSPF Area Aggregation setting.  
Figure 6- 119. OSPF Aggregation Configuration – Add window  
Specify the OSPF aggregation settings and click the Apply button to add or change the settings.The new settings will appear listed in the OSPF Area  
Aggregation Settings table.To view the table, click the Show All OSPF Aggregation Entries link to return to the previous window.  
Configure the following settings for OSPF Area Aggregation:  
Parameter  
Area ID  
Description  
Allows the entry the OSPF Area ID for which the routing information will be aggregated.This Area ID must be  
previously defined on the Switch.  
Network Number  
Sometimes called the Network Address.The 32-bit number in the form of an IP address that uniquely identifies  
the network that corresponds to the OSPF Area above.  
Network Mask  
LSDB Type  
The corresponding network mask for the Network Number specified above.  
Specifies the type of address aggregation, which is set at Summary.  
Advertisement  
Select Enabled or Disabled to determine whether the selected OSPF Area will advertise it’s summary LSDB  
(Network-Number and Network-Mask).  
OSPF Host Route Settings  
OSPF host routes work in a way analogous to RIP, only this is used to share OSPF information with other OSPF routers.This is used to work around problems  
that might prevent OSPF information sharing between routers.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To configure OSPF host routes, click the OSPF Host Route Settings link.To add a new OSPF Route, click the Add button. Configure the setting in the  
menu that appears.The Add and Modify menus for OSPF host route setting are nearly identical.The difference being that if you are changing an existing  
configuration you will be unable to change the Host Address.To change an existing configuration, click on the hyperlinked Host Address in the list for the  
configuration you want to change and proceed to change the metric or area ID.To eliminate an existing configuration, click the ꢀ in the Delete column for the  
configuration being removed.  
Figure 6- 120. OSPF Host Route Settings window  
Use the menu below to set up OSPF host routes.  
Figure 6- 121. OSPF Host Route Setting – Add window  
Specify the host route settings and click the Apply button to add or change the settings.The new settings will appear listed in the OSPF Host Route  
Settings list.To view the previous window, click the Show All OSPF Host Route Entries link to return to the previous window.  
The following fields are configured for OSPF host route:  
Parameter  
Description  
Host Address  
Metric  
The IP address of the OSPF host.  
A value between 1 and 65535 that will be advertised for the route.  
Area ID  
A 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the  
OSPF domain.  
DHCP / BOOTP Relay  
The BOOTP hops count limit allows the maximum number of hops (routers) that the BOOTP messages can be relayed through to be set. If a packet’s hop count  
is more than the hop count limit, the packet is dropped.The range is between 1 and 16 hops, with a default value of 4.The relay time threshold sets the minimum  
time (in seconds) that the Switch will wait before forwarding a BOOT REQUEST packet. If the value in the seconds field of the packet is less than the relay time  
threshold, the packet will be dropped.The range is between 0 and 65,536 seconds, with a default value of 0 seconds.  
DHCP / BOOTP Relay Information  
To enable and configure BOOTP or DHCP on the Switch, click Configuration > DHCP/BOOTP Relay > DHCP/BOOTP Global Settings:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 122. DHCP/BootP Global Settings window  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
BOOTP Relay Status  
This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull-down menu. It is used to enable or disable  
the BOOTP/DHCP Relay service on the Switch.The default is Disabled.  
BOOTP HOPS Count Limit  
(1-16)  
This field allows an entry between 1 and 16 to define the maximum number of router hops BOOTP messages  
can be forwarded across.The default hop count is 4.  
BOOTP Relay Time Threshold  
(0-65535)  
Allows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds, and defines the maximum time limit for routing a  
BOOTP/DHCP packet. If a value of 0 is entered, the Switch will not process the value in the seconds field of  
the BOOTP or DHCP packet. If a non-zero value is entered, the Switch will use that value, along with the hop  
count to determine whether to forward a given BOOTP or DHCP packet.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
DHCP/BootP Relay Settings  
The DHCP/BootP Relay settings allow the user to set up a server, by IP address, for relaying DHCP/BootP information to the Switch.The user may enter a  
previously configured IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the DHCP/BootP server using the following window. Properly configured  
settings will be displayed in the BootP RelayTable at the bottom of the following window, once the user clicks the Add button.The user may add up to four  
Server IPs per IP interface on the Switch. Entries may be deleted by clicking it’s corresponding ꢀ.  
Figure 6- 123. DHCP/BootP Relay Settings and BootP RelayTable window  
The following parameters may be configured or viewed.  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface  
Server IP  
The IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the Server.  
Enter the IP address of the DHCP/BootP server. Up to four Server IPs can be configured per IP Interface.  
DNS Relay  
Computer users usually prefer to use text names for computers they may want to open a connection with. Computers themselves, require 32 bit IP addresses.  
Somewhere, a database of network devices’ text names and their corresponding IP addresses must be maintained.  
The Domain Name System (DNS) is used to map names to IP addresses throughout the Internet and has been adapted for use within intranets.  
For two DNS servers to communicate across different subnets, the DNS Relay of the Switch must be used.The DNS servers are identified by IP addresses.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mapping Domain Names to Addresses  
Name-to-address translation is performed by a program called a Name server.The client program is called a Name resolver.A Name resolver may need to  
contact several Name servers to translate a name to an address.  
The Domain Name System (DNS) servers are organized in a somewhat hierarchical fashion.A single server often holds names for a single network, which is  
connected to a root DNS server – usually maintained by an ISP.  
Domain Name Resolution  
The domain name system can be used by contacting the name servers one at a time, or by asking the domain name system to do the complete name translation.  
The client makes a query containing the name, the type of answer required, and a code specifying whether the domain name system should do the entire name  
translation, or simply return the address of the next DNS server if the server receiving the query cannot resolve the name.  
When a DNS server receives a query, it checks to see if the name is in its sub domain. If it is, the server translates the name and appends the answer to the  
query, and sends it back to the client. If the DNS server cannot translate the name, it determines what type of name resolution the client requested.A complete  
translation is called recursive resolution and requires the server to contact other DNS servers until the name is resolved. Iterative resolution specifies that if the  
DNS server cannot supply an answer, it returns the address of the next DNS server the client should contact.  
Each client must be able to contact at least one DNS server, and each DNS server must be able to contact at least one root server.  
The address of the machine that supplies domain name service is often supplied by a DHCP or BOOTP server, or can be entered manually and configured into  
the operating system at startup.  
Configuring DNS Relay Information  
To configure the DNS function on the Switch, open the Configuration folder and click the DNS Relay folder. In this folder, click the DNS Relay  
Information link to open the following window.  
Figure 6- 124. DNS Global Settings window  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
DNS Relay Status  
This field can be toggled between Disabled and Enabled using the pull-down menu, and is used to enable or  
disable the DNS Relay service on the Switch.  
Primary Name Server  
Secondary Name Server  
DNSR Cache Status  
Allows the entry of the IP address of a primary domain name server (DNS).  
Allows the entry of the IP address of a secondary domain name server (DNS).  
This can be toggled between Disabled and Enabled.This determines if a DNS cache will be enabled on the  
Switch.  
DNS Static Table Status  
This field can be toggled using the pull-down menu between Disabled and Enabled.This determines if the static  
DNS table will be used or not.  
DNS Relay Static Settings  
To view the DNS Relay Static Settings, open the DNS Relay folder in the Configuration folder and click the DNS Relay Static Settings link,  
which will open the following window.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 125. DNS Relay Static Settings andTable window  
To add an entry into the DNS Relay Static Table, simply enter a Domain Name with its corresponding IP address and click Add.A successful entry will be  
presented in the table below, as shown in the example above.To erase an entry from the table, click the corresponding ꢀ of the entry you wish to delete.  
VRRP  
VRRP or Virtual Routing Redundancy Protocol is a function on the Switch that dynamically assigns responsibility for a virtual router to one of theVRRP routers on a  
LAN.TheVRRP router that controls the IP address associated with a virtual router is called the Master, and will forward packets sent to this IP address.This will  
allow anyVirtual Router IP address on the LAN to be used as the default first hop router by end hosts. UtilizingVRRP, the administrator can achieve a higher  
available default path cost without needing to configure every end host for dynamic routing or routing discovery protocols.  
Statically configured default routes on the LAN are prone to a single point of failure.VRRP is designed to eliminate these failures by setting an election protocol  
that will assign a responsibility for a virtual router to one of theVRRP routers on the LAN.When a virtual router fails, the election protocol will select a virtual  
router with the highest priority to be the Master router on the LAN.This retains the link and the connection is kept alive, regardless of the point of failure.  
To configureVRRP for virtual routers on the Switch, an IP interface must be present on the system and it must be a part of aVLAN.VRRP IP interfaces may be  
assigned to everyVLAN, and therefore IP interface, on the Switch.VRRP routers within the sameVRRP group must be consistent in configuration settings for this  
protocol to function optimally.  
VRRP Configuration  
To enableVRRP globally on the Switch, click Configuration > Layer 3 IP Networking > VRRP > VRRP Global Settings:  
Figure 6- 126.VRRP Global Settings window  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Global VRRP  
Use the pull-down menu to enable or disableVRRP globally on the Switch.The default is Disabled.  
Non-owner response PING  
Enabling this parameter will allow the virtual IP address to be pinged from other host end nodes to verify  
connectivity.This will only enable the ping connectivity check function.This command is Disabled by default.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
VRRP Interface Settings  
The following window will allow the user to view the parameters for theVRRP function on the Switch.To view this window, click Configuration > Layer 3  
IP Networking > VRRP > VRRP Configuration:  
Figure 6- 127.VRRP Configuration window  
The following fields are displayed in the window above:  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
An IP interface name that has been enabled forVRRP.This entry must have been previously set in the IP  
Interfaces table.  
Authentication type  
Displays the type of authentication used to compareVRRP packets received by a virtual router. Possible  
authentication types include  
No authentication – No authentication has been selected to compareVRRP packets received by a virtual router.  
SimpleText Password – A Simple password has been selected to compareVRRP packets received by a virtual  
router, for authentication.  
IP Authentication Header – An MD5 message digest algorithm has been selected to compareVRRP packets  
received by a virtual router, for authentication.  
VRID  
Displays the virtual router ID set by the user.This will uniquely identify theVRRP Interface on the network.  
Display  
Click the View button to display the settings for this particularVRRP entry.  
Delete  
Click the ꢀ to delete thisVRRP entry.  
Click the Add button to display the following window to configure aVRRP interface.  
Figure 6- 128.VRRP Interface Settings – Add window  
Or, the user may click the hyperlinked Interface Name to view the same window:  
The following parameters may be set to configure an existing or newVRRP interface.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
Enter the name of a previously configured IP interface to create aVRRP entry for.This IP interface must be  
assigned to aVLAN on the Switch.  
VRID (1-255)  
IP Address  
Enter a value between 1 and 255 to uniquely identify thisVRRP group on the Switch.All routers participating in  
this group must be assigned the same VRID value.This value MUST be different from otherVRRP groups set on  
the Switch.  
Enter the IP address that will be assigned to theVRRP router.This IP address is also the default gateway that  
will be statically assigned to end hosts and must be set for all routers that participate in this group.  
Admin. State  
Used to enable (Up) and disable (Down) theVRRP IP interface on the Switch.  
Priority (1-254)  
Enter a value between 1 and 254 to indicate the router priority.TheVRRP Priority value may determine if a  
higher priorityVRRP router overrides a lower priorityVRRP router.A higher priority will increase the  
probability that this router will become the Master router of the group.A lower priority will increase the  
probability that this router will become the backup router.VRRP routers that are assigned the same priority  
value will elect the highest physical IP address as the Master router.The default value is 100. (The value of 255 is  
reserved for the router that owns the IP address associated with the virtual router and is therefore set  
automatically.)  
Advertisement Interval (1-255) Enter a time interval value, in seconds, for sendingVRRP message packets.This value must be consistent with all  
participating routers.The default is 1 second.  
Preempt Mode  
This entry will determine the behavior of backup routers within theVRRP group by controlling whether a  
higher priority backup router will preempt a lower priority Master router.A True entry, along with having the  
backup router’s priority set higher than the masters priority, will set the backup router as the Master router.A  
False entry will disable the backup router from becoming the Master router.This setting must be consistent  
with all routers participating within the sameVRRP group.The default setting is True.  
Critical IP Address  
Enter the IP address of the physical device that will provide the most direct route to the Internet or other  
critical network connections from this virtual router.This must be a real IP address of a real device on the  
network. If the connection from the virtual router to this IP address fails, the virtual router will automatically  
disabled.A new Master will be elected from the backup routers participating in theVRRP group. Different  
critical IP addresses may be assigned to different routers participating in theVRRP group, and can therefore  
define multiple routes to the Internet or other critical network connections.  
Checking Critical IP  
Auth. Type  
Use the pull-down menu to enable or disable the Critical IP address entered above.  
Specifies the type of authentication used.The Auth.Type must be consistent with all routers participating within  
theVRRP group.The choices are:  
None – Selecting this parameter indicates thatVRRP protocol exchanges will not be authenticated.  
Simple – Selecting this parameter will require the user to set a simple password in the Auth. Data field for  
comparingVRRP message packets received by a router. If the two passwords are not exactly the same, the  
packet will be dropped.  
IP – Selecting this parameter will require the user to set a MD5 message digest for authentication in comparing  
VRRP messages received by the router. If the two values are inconsistent, the packet will be dropped.  
Auth. Data  
This field is only valid if the user selects Simple or IP in the Auth.Type field. Simple will require the user to  
enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 8 characters to identifyVRRP packets received by a router. IP will  
require the user to enter a MD5 message digest for authentication in comparingVRRP messages received by  
the router.This entry must be consistent with all routers participating in the same IP interface.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
To view the settings for a particularVRRP setting, click the corresponding View in the VRRP Interface Table of the entry, which will display the following:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6- 129.VRRP Interface Entry Display window  
This window displays the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
An IP interface name that has been enabled forVRRP.This entry must have been previously set in the IP  
Interface Settings table.  
Authentication type  
Displays the type of authentication used to compareVRRP packets received by a virtual router. Possible  
authentication types include:  
No authentication – No authentication has been selected to compareVRRP packets received by a virtual router.  
SimpleText Password – A Simple password has been selected to compareVRRP packets received by a virtual  
router, for authentication.  
IP Authentication Header – An MD5 message digest algorithm has been selected to compareVRRP packets  
received by a virtual router, for authentication.  
VRID  
Displays the virtual router ID set by the user.This will uniquely identify theVRRP Interface on the network  
Interface on the network.  
Virtual IP Address  
Virtual MAC Address  
Virtual Router State  
Admin. State  
The IP address of theVirtual router configured on the Switch.  
The MAC address of the device that holds theVirtual router.  
Displays the current status of the virtual router. Possible states include Initialize, Master and Backup.  
Displays the current state of the router. Up will be displayed if the virtual router is enabled and Down if the  
virtual router is disabled.  
Priority  
Displays the priority of the virtual router.A higher priority will increase the probability that this router will  
become the Master router of the group.A lower priority will increase the probability that this router will  
become the backup router.The lower the number, the higher the priority.  
Master IP Address  
Critical IP Address  
Displays the IP address of the Master router for theVRRP function.  
Displays the critical IP address of theVRRP function.This address will judge if a virtual router is qualified to be a  
master router.  
Checking Critical IP  
Advertisement Interval  
Preempt Mode  
Displays the status of the Critical IP address. May be enabled or disabled.  
Displays the time interval, in seconds thatVRRP messages are sent out to the network.  
Displays the mode for determining the behavior of backup routers set on thisVRRP interface. True will denote  
that this will be the backup router, if the routers priority is set higher than the master router. False will disable  
the backup router from becoming the master router.  
Virtual Router Up Time  
Displays the time, in minutes, since the virtual router has been initialized.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
IP Multicast Routing Protocol  
The functions supporting IP multicasting are added under the IP Multicast Routing Protocol folder, from the Layer 3 IP Networking folder.  
IGMP Snooping, DVMRP, and PIM-DM can be enabled or disabled on the Switch without changing the individual protocol’s configuration.  
IGMP Interface Configuration  
The Internet Group Multicasting Protocol (IGMP) can be configured on the Switch on a per-IP interface basis.To view the IGMP Interface Table, open the  
IP Multicast Routing Protocol folder under Configuration and click IGMP Interface Settings. Each IP interface configured on the Switch is  
displayed in the below IGMP Interface Table dialog box.To configure IGMP for a particular interface, click the corresponding hyperlink for that IP interface.  
This will open another IGMP Interface Configuration window:  
Figure 6- 130. IGMP InterfaceTable  
Figure 6- 131. IGMP Interface Configuration window  
This window allows the configuration of IGMP for each IP interface configured on the Switch. IGMP can be configured asVersion 1 or 2 by toggling the Version  
field using the pull-down menu.The length of time between queries can be varied by entering a value between 1 and 65,535 seconds in the Query Interval  
field.The maximum length of time between the receipt of a query and the sending of an IGMP response report can be varied by entering a value in the Max  
Response Time field.  
The Robustness Variable field allows IGMP to be ‘tuned’ for sub-networks that are expected to lose a lot of packets.A high value (max. 255) for the  
robustness variable will help compensate for ‘lossy’ sub-networks.A low value (min. 2) should be used for less ‘lossy’ sub-networks.  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
Displays the name of the IP interface that is to be configured for IGMP.This must be a previously configured IP  
interface.  
IP Address  
Version  
Displays the IP address corresponding to the IP interface name above.  
Enter the IGMP version (1 or 2) that will be used to interpret IGMP queries on the interface.  
Query Interval  
Allows the entry of a value between 1 and 65535 seconds, with a default of 125 seconds.This specifies the  
length of time between sending IGMP queries.  
Max Response Time  
Robustness Variable  
Sets the maximum amount of time allowed before sending an IGMP response report.A value between 1 and 25  
seconds can be entered, with a default of 10 seconds.  
A tuning variable to allow for subnetworks that are expected to lose a large number of packets.A value  
between 2 and 255 can be entered, with larger values being specified for subnetworks that are expected to lose  
larger numbers of packets.  
Last Member Query Interval  
State  
Specifies the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, including those sent in  
response to leave group messages.A value between 1 and 25.The default is 1 second.  
This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled and enables or disables IGMP for the IP interface.The  
default is Disabled.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
DVMRP Interface Configuration  
The DistanceVector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) is a hop-based method of building multicast delivery trees from multicast sources to all nodes of a  
network. Because the delivery trees are ‘pruned’ and ‘shortest path’, DVMRP is relatively efficient. Because multicast group membership information is forwarded  
by a distance-vector algorithm, propagation is slow. DVMRP is optimized for high delay (high latency) relatively low bandwidth networks, and can be considered as  
a ‘best-effort’ multicasting protocol.  
DVMRP resembles the Routing Information Protocol (RIP), but is extended for multicast delivery. DVMRP builds a routing table to calculate ‘shortest paths’ back  
to the source of a multicast message, but defines a ‘route cost’ (similar to the hop count in RIP) as a relative number that represents the real cost of using this  
route in the construction of a multicast delivery tree to be ‘pruned’ – once the delivery tree has been established.  
When a sender initiates a multicast, DVMRP initially assumes that all users on the network will want to receive the multicast message.When an adjacent router  
receives the message, it checks its unicast routing table to determine the interface that gives the shortest path (lowest cost) back to the source. If the multicast  
was received over the shortest path, then the adjacent router enters the information into its tables and forwards the message. If the message is not received on  
the shortest path back to the source, the message is dropped.  
Route cost is a relative number that is used by DVMRP to calculate which branches of a multicast delivery tree should be ‘pruned’.The ‘cost’ is relative to other  
costs assigned to other DVMRP routes throughout the network.  
The higher the route cost, the lower the probability that the current route will be chosen to be an active branch of the multicast delivery tree (not ‘pruned’) – if  
there is an alternative route.  
DVMRP Global Setting  
To enable DVMRP globally on the Switch, open the IP Multicast Routing Protocol folder in the Configuration folder, and click the DVMR  
Configuration link.This will give the user access to the following screen:  
Figure 6- 132. DVMRP Global Settings window  
Use the pull down menu, choose Enabled, and click Apply to implement the DVMRP function on the Switch.  
DVMRP Interface Settings  
To view the DVMRP Interface Table, open the IP Multicasting folder under Configuration and click DVMRP Interface Settings.This menu  
allows the Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) to be configured for each IP interface defined on the Switch. Each IP interface  
configured on the Switch is displayed in the below DVMRP Interface Configuration dialog box.To configure DVMRP for a particular interface, click the  
corresponding hyperlink for that IP interface.This will open the DVMRP Interface Configuration window:  
Figure 6- 133. DVMRP Interface Settings window  
Figure 6- 134. DVMRP Interface Settings – Edit window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
Displays the name of the IP interface for which DVMRP is to be configured.This must be a previously defined IP  
interface.  
IP Address  
Displays the IP address corresponding to the IP Interface name entered above.  
Neighbor Timeout Interval  
(1-65535)  
This field allows an entry between 1 and 65,535 seconds and defines the time period for DVMRP will hold  
Neighbor Router reports before issuing poison route messages.The default is 35 seconds.  
Probe Interval (1-65535)  
Metric (1-31)  
This field allows an entry between 1 and 65,535 seconds and defines the interval between ‘probes’.The default  
is 10.  
This field allows an entry between 1 and 31 and defines the route cost for the IP interface.The DVMRP route  
cost is a relative number that represents the real cost of using this route in the construction of a multicast  
delivery tree. It is similar to, but not defined as, the hop count in RIP.The default cost is 1.  
State  
This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled and enables or disables DVMRP for the IP interface.  
The default is Disabled.  
PIM-DM Interface Configuration  
The Protocol Independent Multicast – Dense Mode (PIM-DM) protocol should be used in networks with a low delay (low latency) and high bandwidth as PIM-DM is  
optimized to guarantee delivery of multicast packets, not to reduce overhead.  
The PIM-DM multicast routing protocol is assumes that all downstream routers want to receive multicast messages and relies upon explicit prune messages from  
downstream routers to remove branches from the multicast delivery tree that do not contain multicast group members.  
PIM-DM has no explicit ‘join’ messages. It relies upon periodic flooding of multicast messages to all interfaces and then either waiting for a timer to expire (the  
Join/Prune Interval) or for the downstream routers to transmit explicit ‘prune’ messages indicating that there are no multicast members on their respective  
branches. PIM-DM then removes these branches (‘prunes’ them) from the multicast delivery tree.  
Because a member of a pruned branch of a multicast delivery tree may want to join a multicast delivery group (at some point in the future), the protocol  
periodically removes the ‘prune’ information from its database and floods multicast messages to all interfaces on that branch.The interval for removing ‘prune’  
information is the Join/Prune Interval.  
PIM-DM Configuration  
To enable PIM-DM globally on the Switch, go to Configuration > IP Multicast Routing Protocol > PIM > PIM-DM Configuration.This will give  
the user access to the following screen:  
Figure 6- 135. PIM DM Global Settings window  
Use the pull down menu, choose Enabled, and click Apply to set the PIM-DM function on the Switch.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To view the PIM-DM Table, open the IP Multicasting folder under Configuration and click PIM-DM Interface Configuration.This window  
allows the PIM-DM to be configured for each IP interface defined on the Switch. Each IP interface configured on the Switch is displayed in the below PIM-DM  
Interface Table dialog box.To configure PIM-DM for a particular interface, click the corresponding hyperlink for that IP interface.This will open the PIM-  
DM Interface Configuration window:  
Figure 6- 136. PIM-DM Interface Settings window  
Figure 6- 137. PIM-DM Interface Settings window – Modify  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Interface Name  
Allows the entry of the name of the IP interface for which PIM-DM is to be configured.This must be a  
previously defined IP interface.  
IP Address  
Displays the IP address for the IP interface named above.  
Hello Interval (1-18724)  
This field allows an entry of between 1 and 18724 seconds and determines the interval between sending Hello  
packets to other routers on the network.The default is 30 seconds.  
Join/Prune Interval (1-18724) This field allows an entry of between 1 and 18724 seconds.This interval also determines the time interval the  
router uses to automatically remove prune information from a branch of a multicast delivery tree and begin to  
flood multicast messages to all branches of that delivery tree.These two actions are equivalent.The default is  
60 seconds.  
State  
This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull-down menu, and is used to enable or  
disable PIM-DM for the IP interface.The default is Disabled.  
Click Apply to implement changes made. Click Show All PIM-DM Interface Entries to return to the PIM-DM Interface Table.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 - Security Management  
7-1 Security IP  
7-2 User Accounts  
7-3 Access Authentication Control (TACACS)  
7-4 Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)  
7-5 Secure Shell (SSH)  
The following section will aid the user in configuring security functions for the Switch.The Switch includes various functions for security, including TACACS,  
Security IPs, SSL, and SSH, all discussed in detail in the following section.  
7-1 Security IP  
Go to the Security Management folder and click on the Security IP link; the following screen will appear.  
Figure 7- 1. Security IP Management window  
Use the Security IP Management window to permit remote stations to manage the Switch. If you choose to define one or more designated management  
stations, only the chosen stations, as defined by IP address, will be allowed management privilege through the web manager orTelnet session.To define a  
management station IP setting, type in the IP address and click the Apply button.  
7-2 User Accounts  
Use the User Accounts Management window to control user privileges.To view existing User Accounts, open the Security Management folder and  
click on the User Accounts link.This will open the User Account Management page, as shown below.  
Figure 7- 2. User Account ManagementTable  
To add a new user, click on the Add button.To modify or delete an existing user, click on the Modify button for that user.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 7- 3. User Accounts ModifyTable – Add  
Add a new user by typing in a User Name, and New Password and retype the same password in the Confirm New Password. Choose the level of  
privilege (Admin or User) from the Access Right drop-down menu.  
Figure 7- 4. User Account ModifyTable – Modify  
Modify or delete an existing user account in the User Account Modify Table.To delete the user account, click on the Delete button.To change the  
password, type in the New Password and retype it in the Confirm New Password entry field.The level of privilege (Admin or User) can be viewed in the  
Access Right field.  
Admin and User Privileges  
There are two levels of user privileges, Admin and User. Some menu selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with  
User privileges.  
The following table summarizes the Admin and User privileges:  
Management  
Admin  
User  
Configuration  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
No  
Network Monitoring  
Community Strings andTrap Stations  
Update Firmware and Configuration Files  
System Utilities  
No  
Factory Reset  
No  
User Account Management  
Add/Update/Delete User Accounts  
View User Accounts  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Table 7- 1.Admin and User Privileges  
After establishing a User Account with Admin-level privileges, be sure to save the changes by opening the Maintenance folder, opening the Save Changes window  
and clicking the Save Configuration button.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3 Access Authentication Control  
TheTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS commands let you secure access to the Switch using theTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS  
protocols.When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege, he or she is prompted for a password. IfTACACS / XTACACS /  
TACACS+ / RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch, it will contact aTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS server to verify the user. If the user is  
verified, he or she is granted access to the Switch.  
There are currently three versions of theTACACS security protocol, each a separate entity.The Switch's software supports the following versions ofTACACS:  
•
•
•
TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) – Provides password checking and authentication, and notification of user actions for  
security purposes utilizing via one or more centralizedTACACS servers, utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission.  
Extended TACACS (XTACACS) – An extension of theTACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and  
more types of response codes thanTACACS.This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets.  
TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus) – Provides detailed access control for authentication for  
network devices.TACACS+ is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers.TheTACACS+ protocol encrypts all  
traffic between the Switch and theTACACS+ daemon, using theTCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery.  
In order for theTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS security function to work properly, aTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS server must be  
configured on a device other than the Switch, called an Authentication Server Host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication.When the  
user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication, the Switch contacts theTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS  
server to verify, and the server will respond with one of three messages:  
•
•
•
The server verifies the username and password, and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch.  
The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch.  
The server doesn't respond to the verification query. At this point, the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next  
method of verification configured in the method list.  
The Switch has four built-in Authentication Server Groups, one for each of theTACACS, XTACACS,TACACS+ and RADIUS protocols.These built-in  
Authentication Server Groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch.The users will set Authentication Server Hosts in a preferable  
order in the built-in Authentication Server Groups and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch, the Switch will ask the first Authentication Server Hosts  
for authentication. If no authentication is made, the second server host in the list will be queried, and so on.The built-in Authentication Server Groups can only  
have hosts that are running the specified protocol. For example, theTACACS Authentication Server Groups can only haveTACACS Authentication Server Hosts.  
The administrator for the Switch may set up 6 different authentication techniques per user-defined method list (TACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS /  
local / none) for authentication.These techniques will be listed in an order preferable, and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch, and  
may contain up to eight authentication techniques.When a user attempts to access the Switch, the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication.  
If the first technique goes through its Authentication Server Hosts and no authentication is returned, the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the  
server group for authentication, until the authentication has been verified or denied, or the list is exhausted.  
Please note that users granted access to the Switch will be granted normal user privileges on the Switch.To gain access to administrator level privileges, the user  
must access the Enable Admin window and then enter a password, which was previously configured by the administrator of the Switch.  
Note:  
TACACS, XTACACS andTACACS+ are separate entities and are not compatible.The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the  
same, using the same protocol. (For example, if the Switch is set up forTACACS authentication, so must be the host server.)  
Policy & Parameters  
This command will enable an administrator-defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch.When enabled, the device will check the Login  
Method List and choose a technique for user authentication upon login.  
To access the following window, click Security Management > Access Authentication Control > Policy & Parameters:  
Figure 7- 5. Policy & Parameters Settings window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Authentication Policy  
Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Authentication Policy on the Switch.  
Response Timeout (0-255)  
This field will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user.The user may set  
a time between 0 and 255 seconds.The default setting is 30 seconds.  
User Attempts (1-255)  
This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts.  
Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will  
be locked out of further authentication attempts. Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds  
before another authentication attempt.TELNET and web users will be disconnected from the Switch.The user  
may set the number of attempts from 1 to 255.The default setting is 3.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Application's Authentication Settings  
This window is used to configure switch configuration applications (console,Telnet, SSH, web) for login at the user level and at the administration level (Enable  
Admin) utilizing a previously configured method list.To view the following window, click Security Management > Access Authentication Control >  
Application Authentication Settings:  
Figure 7- 6.Application's Authentication Settings window  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Application  
Description  
Lists the configuration applications on the Switch.The user may configure the Login Method List and  
Enable Method List for authentication for users utilizing the Console (Command Line Interface)  
application, theTelnet application, SSH and theWEB (HTTP) application.  
Login Method List  
Enable Method List  
Using the pull down menu, configure an application for normal login on the user level, utilizing a previously  
configured method list.The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user.  
See the Login Method Lists window, in this section, for more information.  
Using the pull down menu, configure an application for normal login on the user level, utilizing a previously  
configured method list.The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user.  
See the Enable Method Lists window, in this section, for more information.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Authentication Server Group Settings  
This window will allow users to set up Authentication Server Groups on the Switch.A server group is a technique used to group  
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS server hosts into user-defined categories for authentication using method lists.The user may define the type of server  
group by protocol or by previously defined server group.The Switch has four built-in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified.  
Up to eight (8) authentication server hosts may be added to any particular group.  
To view the following window, click Security Management > Access Authentication Control > Authentication Server Group:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 7- 7.Authentication Server Group Settings window  
This screen displays the Authentication Server Groups on the Switch.The Switch has four built-in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can  
be modified.To modify a particular group, click its hyperlinked Group Name, which will then display the following window.  
Figure 7- 8.Add a Server Host to Server Group (XTACACS) window.  
To add an Authentication Server Host to the list, enter its IP address in the IP Address field, choose the protocol associated with the IP address of the  
Authentication Server Host and click ADD to Group to add this Authentication Server Host to the group.  
To add a server group other than the ones listed, click the add button, revealing the following window to configure.  
Figure 7- 9.Authentication Server GroupTable Add Settings window  
Enter a group name of up to 15 characters into the Group Name field and click Apply.The entry should appear in the Authentication Server Group  
Settings window, as shown in Figure 7-7 (trinity).  
Note:  
The user must configure Authentication Server Hosts using the Authentication Server Hosts window before adding hosts to the list.  
Authentication Server Hosts must be configured for their specific protocol on a remote centralized server before this function can work properly.  
Note:  
The built-in server groups can only have server hosts running the sameTACACS or RADIUS daemon.TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+  
protocols are separate entities and are not compatible with each other.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Authentication Server Hosts  
This window will set user-defined Authentication Server Hosts for theTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS security protocols on the Switch.When  
a user attempts to access the Switch with Authentication Policy enabled, the Switch will send authentication packets to a remoteTACACS / XTACACS /  
TACACS+ / RADIUS server host on a remote host.TheTACACS / XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return  
the appropriate message to the Switch. More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but, remember thatTACACS /  
XTACACS /TACACS+ / RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other.The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16.  
To view the following window, click Security Management > Access Authentication Control > Authentication Server Host:  
Figure 7- 10.Authentication Server Host Settings window  
To add an Authentication Server Host, click the Add button, revealing the following window:  
Figure 7- 11.Authentication Server Host Setting window – Add  
Configure the following parameters to add an Authentication Server Host:  
Parameter  
Description  
IP Address  
Protocol  
The IP address of the remote server host the user wishes to add.  
The protocol used by the server host.The user may choose one of the following:  
TACACS – Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes theTACACS protocol.  
XTACACS – Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol.  
TACACS+ – Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes theTACACS+ protocol.  
RADIUS – Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol.  
Port (1-65535)  
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a  
server host.The default port number is 49 forTACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ servers and 1813 for RADIUS  
servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security.  
Timeout (1-255)  
Retransmit (1-255)  
Key  
Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request.The  
default value is 5 seconds.  
Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication  
request when theTACACS server does not respond.  
Authentication key to be shared with a configuredTACACS+ or RADIUS servers only. Specify an alphanumeric  
string up to 254 characters.  
Click Apply to add the server host.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Note:  
More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but, remember thatTACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+  
are separate entities and are not compatible with each other.  
Login Method Lists  
This command will configure a user-defined or default Login Method List of authentication techniques for users logging on to the Switch.The sequence of  
techniques implemented in this command will affect the authentication result. For example, if a user enters a sequence of techniques, for exampleTACACS -  
XTACACS- local, the Switch will send an authentication request to the firstTACACS host in the server group. If no response comes from the server host, the  
Switch will send an authentication request to the secondTACACS host in the server group and so on, until the list is exhausted.At that point, the Switch will  
restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed, XTACACS. If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list, the local account database set  
in the Switch is used to authenticate the user.When the local method is used, the privilege level will be dependant on the local account privilege configured on  
the Switch.  
Successful login using any of these techniques will give the user a "User" privilege only. If the user wishes to upgrade his or her status to the administrator level,  
the user must use the Enable Admin window, in which the user must enter a previously configured password, set by the administrator. (See the Enable  
Admin part of this section for more detailed information concerning the Enable Admin command.)  
To view the following screen click Security Management > Access Authentication Control > Login Method Lists:  
Figure 7- 12. Login Method Lists Settings window  
The Switch contains one Method List that is set and cannot be removed, yet can be modified.To delete a Login Method List defined by the user, click the  
ꢀ under the Delete heading corresponding to the entry desired to be deleted.To modify a Login Method List, click on its hyperlinked Method List Name.  
To configure a new Method List, click the Add button.  
Both actions will result in the same screen to configure:  
Figure 7- 13. Login Method List – Edit (default)  
Figure 7- 14. Login Method List – Add  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To define a Login Method List, set the following parameters and click Apply:  
Parameter  
Description  
Method List Name  
Method 1, 2, 3, 4  
Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters.  
The user may add one, or a combination of up to four (4) of the following authentication methods to this  
method list:  
tacacs – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using theTACACS protocol from a  
remoteTACACS server.  
xtacacs – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a  
remote XTACACS server.  
tacacs+ – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using theTACACS+ protocol from a  
remoteTACACS+ server.  
radius – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a  
remote RADIUS server.  
server_group – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user-defined server  
group previously configured on the Switch.  
local – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on  
the Switch.  
none – Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch.  
Enable Method Lists  
The Enable Method Lists window is used to set up Method Lists to promote users with user level privileges to Administrator (Admin) level privileges using  
authentication methods on the Switch. Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch, he or she must be authenticated by a method on the  
Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch, which is defined by the Administrator.A maximum of eight (8) Enable Method Lists can be implemented on  
the Switch, one of which is a default Enable Method List.This default Enable Method List cannot be deleted but can be configured.  
The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result. For example, if a user enters a sequence of methods likeTACACS -  
XTACACS - Local Enable, the Switch will send an authentication request to the firstTACACS host in the server group. If no verification is found, the Switch will  
send an authentication request to the secondTACACS host in the server group and so on, until the list is exhausted.At that point, the Switch will restart the  
same sequence with the following protocol listed, XTACACS. If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list, the Local Enable password set in the  
Switch is used to authenticate the user.  
Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an "Admin" privilege.  
Note  
To set the Local Enable Password, see the next section, entitled Local Enable Password.  
To view the following table, click Security Management > Access Authentication Control > Enable Method Lists:  
Figure 7- 15. Enable Method List Settings window.  
To delete an Enable Method List defined by the user, click the ꢀ under the Delete heading corresponding to the entry desired to be deleted.To modify an  
Enable Method List, click on its hyperlinked Method List Name.To configure a Method List, click the Add button.  
Both actions will result in the same screen to configure:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 7- 16. Enable Method List – Edit window  
Figure 7- 17. Enable Method List – Add window  
To define an Enable Login Method List, set the following parameters and click Apply:  
Parameter  
Description  
Method List Name  
Method 1, 2, 3, 4  
Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters.  
The user may add one, or a combination of up to four (4) of the following authentication methods to this  
method list:  
local_enable – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local enable password  
database on the Switch.The local enable password must be set by the user in the next section entitled Local  
Enable Password.  
none – Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch.  
radius – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a  
remote RADIUS server.  
tacacs – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using theTACACS protocol from a  
remoteTACACS server.  
xtacacs – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a  
remote XTACACS server.  
tacacs+ – Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using theTACACS protocol from a  
remoteTACACS server.  
server_group – Adding a previously configured server group will require the user to be authenticated using a  
user-defined server group previously configured on the Switch.  
Local Enable Password  
This window will configure the locally enabled password for the Enable Admin command.When a user chooses the "local_enable" method to promote user  
level privileges to administrator privileges, he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is locally set on the Switch.  
To view the following window, click Security Management > Access Authentication Control > Local Enable Password:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 7- 18. Configure Local Enable Password window  
To set the Local Enable Password, set the following parameters and click Apply.  
Parameter  
Description  
Old Local Enable Password  
New Local Enable Password  
If a password was previously configured for this entry, enter it here in order to change it to a new password.  
Enter the new password that you wish to set on the Switch to authenticate users attempting to access  
Administrator Level privileges on the Switch.The user may set a password of up to 15 characters.  
Confirm Local Enable Password Confirm the new password entered above. Entering a different password here from the one set in the New  
Local Enabled field will result in a fail message.  
Enable Admin  
The Enable Admin window is for users who have logged on to the Switch on the normal user level, and wish to be promoted to the administrator level.After  
logging on to the Switch, users will have only user level privileges.To gain access to administrator level privileges, the user will open this window and will have to  
enter an authentication password. Possible authentication methods for this function includeTACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS, user defined server groups,  
local enable (local account on the Switch), or no authentication (none). Because XTACACS andTACACS do not support the enable function, the user must  
create a special account on the server host, which has the username "enable", and a password configured by the administrator that will support the "enable"  
function.This function becomes inoperable when the authentication policy is disabled.  
To view the following window, click Security Management > Access Authentication Control > Enable Admin:  
Figure 7- 19. Enable Admin Screen  
When this screen appears, click the Enable Admin button revealing a window for the user to enter authentication (password, username), as seen below.  
A successful entry will promote the user to Administrator level privileges on the Switch.  
Figure 7- 20. Enter Network Password window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4 Secure Socket Layer (SSL)  
Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication, digital  
signatures and encryption.These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite, which is a security string that determines the exact  
cryptographic parameters, specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels:  
1.  
Key Exchange:The first part of the ciphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used.This Switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman  
(RSA) public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA), specified here as the DHE DSS Diffie-Hellman (DHE) public key algorithm.This  
is the first authentication process between client and host as they “exchange keys” in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted  
to negotiate encryptions on the following level.  
2.  
Encryption:The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host.The  
Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms:  
Stream Ciphers –There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch, RC4 with 40-bit keys and RC4 with 128-bit keys.These keys are used to encrypt  
messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use.  
CBC Block Ciphers – CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining, which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used  
in the encryption of the current block.The Switch supports the 3DES EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard (DES) to create  
the encrypted text.  
3.  
Hash Algorithm:This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication  
Code.This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks.The Switch  
supports two hash algorithms, MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm).  
These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three-layered encryption code for secure communication between the  
server and the host.The user may implement any one or combination of the ciphersuites available, yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the  
performance of the secured connection.The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third  
source in a file form called a certificate.This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be  
downloaded to the Switch by utilizing aTFTP server.The Switch supports SSLv3 andTLSv1. Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and  
may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host.  
Download Certificate  
This window is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from aTFTP server.The certificate file is a data record used for  
authenticating devices on the network. It contains information on the owner, keys for authentication and digital signatures. Both the server and the client must  
have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function.The Switch only supports certificate files with .der file extensions.  
To view the following window, click Security Management > Secure Socket Layer (SSL) > Download Certificate:  
Figure 7- 21. Download Certificate window  
To download certificates, set the following parameters and click Apply.  
Parameter  
Description  
Certificate Type  
Enter the type of certificate to be downloaded.This type refers to the server responsible for issuing  
certificates.This field has been limited to local for this firmware release.  
Server IP  
Enter the IP address of theTFTP server where the certificate files are located.  
Certificate File Name  
Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file to download.This file must have a .der extension. (Ex.  
c:/cert.der).  
Key File Name  
Enter the path and the filename of the key file to download.This file must have a .der extension (Ex.  
c:/pkey.der).  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
Configuration  
This screen will allow the user to enable SSL on the Switch and implement any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch.A ciphersuite is a  
security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters, specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session.The  
Switch possesses four possible ciphersuites for the SSL function, which are all enabled by default.To utilize a particular ciphersuite, disable the unwanted  
ciphersuites, leaving the desired one for authentication.  
When the SSL function has been enabled, the web will become disabled.To manage the Switch through the web based management while utilizing the SSL  
function, the web browser must support SSL encryption and the header of the URL must begin with https://. (Ex. https://10.90.90.90) Any other method will  
result in an error and no access can be authorized for the web-based management.  
To view the following window, click Security Management > Secure Socket Layer (SSL) > Configuration:  
Figure 7- 22. Configuration and Ciphersuite window  
To set up the SSL function on the Switch, configure the following parameters and click Apply.  
Parameter  
Description  
Configuration  
SSL Status  
Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the SSL status on the switch.The default is Disabled.  
Cache Timeout (60-84600)  
This field will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using the SSL function.A  
new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange. Specifying a longer  
timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host,  
therefore speeding up the negotiation process.The default setting is 600 seconds.  
Ciphersuite  
RSA with RC4 128 MD5  
This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128-bit keys and the  
MD5 Hash Algorithm. Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite.This field is Enabled by  
default.  
RSA with 3DES EDE CBC SHA This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash  
Algorithm. Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite.This field is Enabled by default.  
DHS DSS with 3DES EDE  
CBC SHA  
This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange, CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and  
SHA Hash Algorithm. Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite.This field is Enabled by  
default.  
RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange and stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40-bit keys.  
Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite.This field is Enabled by default.  
Note:  
Certain implementations concerning the function and configuration of SSL are not available on the web-based management of this Switch  
and need to be configured using the command line interface. For more information on SSL and its functions, see the AT-9724TS Command Line  
Reference Manual, located on the documentation CD of this product.  
Note:  
Enabling the SSL command will disable the web-based switch management.To log on to the Switch again, the header of the URL must begin  
with https://. Entering anything else into the address field of the web browser will result in an error and no authentication will be granted.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5 Secure Shell (SSH)  
SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell, which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services over an insecure network. It allows a  
secure login to remote host computers, a safe method of executing commands on a remote end node, and will provide secure encrypted and authenticated  
communication between two non-trusted hosts. SSH, with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today’s networking environment. It is a  
powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications.  
The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC (the SSH client) and the Switch (the SSH server) are as follows:  
1.  
2.  
Create a user account with admin-level access using the User Accounts window in the Security Management folder.This is identical to creating any  
other admin-level User Account on the Switch, including specifying a password.This password is used to logon to the Switch, once a secure  
communication path has been established using the SSH protocol.  
Configure the User Account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch  
using the SSH User Authentication window.There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user, which are Host  
Based, Password and Public Key.  
3.  
4.  
Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH client and the SSH server, using the SSH  
Algorithm window.  
Finally, enable SSH on the Switch using the SSH Configuration window.  
After completing the preceding steps, a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a secure, in band connection.  
SSH Configuration  
The following window is used to configure and view settings for the SSH server and can be opened by clicking Security Management > Secure Shell  
(SSH) > SSH Configuration:  
Figure 7- 23. Current and New SSH Configuration Settings  
To configure the SSH server on the Switch, modify the following parameters and click Apply:  
Parameter  
Description  
SSH Server Status  
Max Session (1-3)  
Use the pull-down menu to enable or disable SSH on the Switch.The default is Disabled.  
Enter a value between 1 and 3 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch.The  
default setting is 3.  
Connection TimeOut (120-600) Allows the user to set the connection timeout.The use may set a time between 120 and 600 seconds.The  
default setting is 120 seconds.  
Auth. Fail (2-20)  
Allows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on to the SSH  
Server utilizing the SSH authentication.After the maximum number of attempts has been exceeded, the Switch  
will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login.The number of  
maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20.The default setting is 2.  
Session Rekeying  
This field is used to set the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions by using the  
pull-down menu.The available options are Never, 10 min, 30 min, and 60 min.The default setting is Never.  
SSH Algorithm  
The SSH Algorithm window allows the configuration of the desired types of SSH algorithms used for authentication encryption.There are three categories of  
algorithms listed and specific algorithms of each may be enabled or disabled by using their corresponding pull-down menus.All algorithms are enabled by default.  
To open the following window, click Security Management > Secure Shell (SSH) > SSH Algorithm:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 7- 24. SSH Algorithms window  
The following algorithms may be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Authentication Mode Configuration  
Password  
This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured  
password for authentication on the Switch.This field is Enabled by default.  
Public Key  
Host-based  
This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a publickey configuration set  
on a SSH server, for authentication.This field is Enabled by default.  
This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for  
authentication.This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host  
computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed.This field is Enabled by  
default.  
Encryption Algorithm  
3DES-CBC  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable theTriple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with Cipher  
Block Chaining.The default is Enabled.  
Blow-fish CBC  
AES128-CBC  
AES192-CBC  
AES256-CBC  
ARC4  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining.The  
default is Enabled.  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm with  
Cipher Block Chaining.The default is Enabled.  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm with  
Cipher Block Chaining.The default is Enabled.  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES-256 encryption algorithm with  
Cipher Block Chaining.The default is Enabled.  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining.The  
default is Enabled.  
Cast128-CBC  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the Cast128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining.The  
default is Enabled.  
Twofish128  
Twofish192  
Twofish256  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the twofish128 encryption algorithm.The default is Enabled.  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the twofish192 encryption algorithm.The default is Enabled.  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the twofish256 encryption algorithm.The default is Enabled.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data Integrity Algorithm  
HMAC-SHA1  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the HMAC (Hash for Message Authentication Code) mechanism  
utilizing the Secure Hash algorithm.The default is Enabled.  
HMAC-MD5  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the HMAC (Hash for Message Authentication Code) mechanism  
utilizing the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm.The default is Enabled.  
Public Key Algorithm  
HMAC-RSA  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the HMAC (Hash for Message Authentication Code) mechanism  
utilizing the RSA encryption algorithm.The default is Enabled.  
HMAC-DSA  
Use the pull-down to enable or disable the HMAC (Hash for Message Authentication Code) mechanism  
utilizing the Digital Signature Algorithm encryption.The default is Enabled.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
SSH User Authentication  
The following windows are used to configure parameters for users attempting to access the Switch through SSH.To access the following window, click Security  
Management > Secure Shell > SSH User Authentication.  
Figure 7- 25. Current Accounts window  
In the example screen above, the User Account “Trinity” has been previously set using the User Accounts window in the Security Management folder.A  
User Account MUST be set in order to set the parameters for the SSH user.To configure the parameters for a SSH user, click on the hyperlinked User Name  
in the Current Accounts window, which will reveal the following window to configure.  
Figure 7- 26. SSH User window  
The user may set the following parameters:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
User Name  
Description  
Enter a User Name of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user.This User Name must be a  
previously configured user account on the Switch.  
Auth. Mode  
The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users attempting to access the  
Switch.  
Host Based –This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a remote SSH server for  
authentication purposes. Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to  
identify the SSH user.  
Host Name – Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH  
user.  
Host IP – Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user.  
Password –This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use an administrator-defined  
password for authentication. Upon entry of this parameter, the Switch will prompt the administrator for a  
password, and then to re-type the password for confirmation.  
Public Key –This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use the publickey on a SSH server  
for authentication.  
Host Name  
Host IP  
Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user.This parameter is  
only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth. Mode field.  
Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user.This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host  
Based choice in the Auth. Mode field.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
Note:  
To set the SSH User Authentication parameters on the Switch, a User Account must be previously configured. For more information  
on configuring local User Accounts on the Switch, see the User Accounts section of this manual located in this section.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8 - SNMP Manager  
SNMP Settings  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an OSI Layer 7 (Application Layer) designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices. SNMP  
enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways, routers, switches, and other network devices. Use SNMP to configure system  
features for proper operation, monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch, switch group or network.  
Managed devices that support SNMP include software (referred to as an agent), which runs locally on the device.A defined set of variables (managed objects) is  
maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device.These objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB), which provides a standard  
presentation of the information controlled by the on-board SNMP agent. SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to  
access this information over the network.  
The AT-9724TS supports the SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3.You can specify which version of the SNMP you want to use to monitor and control the Switch.The  
three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device.  
In SNMP v.1 and v.2, user authentication is accomplished using 'community strings', which function like passwords.The remote user SNMP application and the  
Switch SNMP must use the same community string. SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored (dropped).  
The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v1 and v2 management access are:  
public – Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects.  
private – Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts.The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are  
allowed to act as SNMP managers.The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager.  
The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges.The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP  
managers.Thus, you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read-only information or receive traps using SNMPv1 while assigning a  
higher level of security to another group, granting read/write privileges using SNMPv3.  
Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions.  
The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier (OID) associated with a specific MIB.An additional layer of security is available for  
SNMPv3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted.To read more about how to configure SNMPv3 settings for the Switch read the next section.  
Traps  
Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch.The events can be as serious as a reboot (someone accidentally turned OFF  
the Switch), or less serious like a port status change.The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient (or network manager).Typical traps include  
trap messages for Authentication Failure,Topology Change and Broadcast\Multicast Storm.  
MIBs  
Management and counter information are stored by the Switch in the Management Information Base (MIB).The Switch uses the standard MIB-II Management  
Information Base module. Consequently, values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP-based network management software. In addition to the  
standard MIB-II, the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base.The proprietary MIB may also be  
retrieved by specifying the MIB Object Identifier. MIB values can be either read-only or read-write.  
The AT-9724TS incorporates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment. SNMP management can be customized to suit the needs of the  
networks and the preferences of the network administrator. Use the SNMPV3 menus to select the SNMP version used for specific tasks.  
The AT-9724TS supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) versions 1, 2c, and 3.The administrator can specify the SNMP version used to  
monitor and control the Switch.The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device.  
SNMP settings are configured using the menus located on the SNMPV3 folder of the web manager.Workstations on the network that are allowed SNMP  
privileged access to the Switch can be restricted with the Management Station IP Address menu.  
SNMP User Table  
The SNMP User Table displays all of the SNMP User's currently configured on the Switch.  
In the SNMP Manager folder, click on the SNMP User Table link.This will open the SNMP User Table, as shown below.  
Figure 8- 1. SNMP UserTable  
To delete an existing SNMP UserTable entry, click the ꢀ below the Delete heading corresponding to the entry you wish to delete.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To display the detailed entry for a given user, click on the hyperlinked User Name.This will open the SNMP User Table Display page, as shown below.  
Figure 8- 2. SNMP UserTable Display window  
The following parameters are displayed:  
Parameter  
Description  
User Name  
An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters.This is used to identify the SNMP users.  
This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages.  
V1 – Indicates that SNMP version 1 is in use.  
Group Name  
SNMP Version  
V2 – Indicates that SNMP version 2 is in use.  
V3 – Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use.  
Auth-Protocol  
Priv-Protocol  
None – Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use.  
MD5 – Indicates that the HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level will be used.  
SHA – Indicates that the HMAC-SHA authentication protocol will be used.  
None – Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use.  
DES – Indicates that DES 56-bit encryption is in use based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard.  
To return to the SNMP User Table, click the Show All SNMP UserTable Entries link.  
To add a new entry to the SNMP User Table Configuration, click on the Add button on the SNMP User Table page.  
This will open the SNMP User Table Configuration page, as shown below.  
Figure 8- 3. SNMP UserTable Configuration window  
The following parameters can be set:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
User Name  
Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters.This is used to identify the SNMP user.  
This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages.  
V1 – Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used.  
Group Name  
SNMP Version  
V2 – Specifies that SNMP version 2 will be used.  
V3 – Specifies that SNMP version 3 will be used.  
Auth-Protocol  
MD5 – Specifies that the HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level will be used.This field is only operable whenV3 is  
selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked.This field will require the  
user to enter a password.  
SHA – Specifies that the HMAC-SHA authentication protocol will be used.This field is only operable whenV3 is  
selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked.This field will require the  
user to enter a password.  
Priv-Protocol  
Encrypted  
None – Specifies that no authorization protocol is in use.  
DES – Specifies that DES 56-bit encryption is in use, based on the CBC-DES (DES-56) standard.This field is  
only operable whenV3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked.  
This field will require the user to enter a password between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters.  
Checking the corresponding box will enable encryption for SNMPV3 and is only operable in SNMPV3 mode.  
To implement changes made, click Apply.To return to the SNMP User Table, click the Show All SNMP UserTable Entries link.  
SNMP View Table  
The SNMPViewTable is used to assign views to community strings that define which MIB objects can be accessed by a remote SNMP manager.To view the  
SNMP View Table, open the SNMP Manager folder and click the SNMP View Table entry.The following screen should appear:  
Figure 8- 4. SNMPViewTable  
To delete an existing SNMP View Table entry, click the ꢀ in the Delete column corresponding to the entry you wish to delete.To create a new entry, click  
the Add button and a separate menu will appear.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 8- 5. SNMPViewTable Configuration window  
The SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users (identified in the SNMP User Table) to the views created in the previous menu.  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
View Name  
Subtree OID  
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters.This is used to identify the new SNMP view being created.  
Type the Object Identifier (OID) Subtree for the view.The OID identifies an object tree (MIB tree) that will be  
included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager.  
View Type  
Select Included to include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access. Select Excluded to  
exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access.  
To implement your new settings, click Apply.To return to the SNMP View Table, click the Show All SNMPViewTable Entries link.  
SNMP Group Table  
An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users (identified in the SNMP UserTable) to the views created in the previous menu.To view the SNMP  
Group Table, open the SNMP Manager folder and click the SNMP Group Table entry.The following screen should appear:  
Figure 8- 6. SNMP GroupTable  
To delete an existing SNMP Group Table entry, click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete heading.  
To display the current settings for an existing SNMP Group Table entry, click the hyperlink for the entry under the Group Name.  
To add a new entry to the Switch's SNMP Group Table, click the Add button in the upper left-hand corner of the SNMP Group Table page.This will  
open the SNMP Group Table Configuration page, as shown below.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 8- 7. SNMP GroupTable Configuration window  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Group Name  
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters.This is used to identify the new SNMP group of SNMP  
users.  
Read View Name  
Write View Name  
Notify View Name  
This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages.  
Specify a SNMP group name for users that are allowed SNMP write privileges to the Switch's SNMP agent.  
Specify a SNMP group name for users that can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch's SNMP  
agent.  
Security Model  
SNMPv1 – Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used.  
SNMPv2 – Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used.The SNMPv2 supports both centralized and distributed  
network management strategies. It includes ReadView Name improvements in the Structure of Management  
Information (SMI) and adds some security features.  
SNMPv3 – Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used. SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices through a  
combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network.  
Security Level  
The Security Level settings only apply to SNMPv3.  
NoAuthNoPriv – Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the  
Switch and a remote SNMP manager.  
AuthNoPriv – Specifies that authorization will be required, but there will be no encryption of packets sent  
between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager.  
AuthPriv – Specifies that authorization will be required, and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote  
SNMP manger will be encrypted.  
To implement your new settings, click Apply.To return to the SNMP Group Table, click the Show All SNMP GroupTable Entries link.  
SNMP Community Table Configuration  
Use this table to create an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent.The community string acts like a  
password to permit access to the agent on the Switch. One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string:  
•
•
•
An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch's SNMP agent.  
Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects will be accessible to the SNMP community.  
Read/write or read-only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community.  
To configure SNMP Community entries, open the SNMP Manager folder and click the SNMP Community Table link, which will open the following  
screen:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 8- 8. SNMP CommunityTable Configuration andTable window  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Community Name  
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 33 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community.  
This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch's SNMP  
agent.  
View Name  
Access Right  
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a  
remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch.The view name must exist in the SNMPViewTable.  
Read Only – Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can only read the  
contents of the MIBs on the Switch.  
ReadWrite – Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can read from, and  
write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch.  
To implement the new settings, click Apply.To delete an entry from the SNMP Community Table, click the ꢀ under the Delete heading, corresponding  
to the entry you wish to delete.  
SNMP Host Table  
Use the SNMP Host Table to set up SNMP trap recipients.  
Open the SNMP Manager folder and click on the SNMP Host Table link.This will open the SNMP Host Table page, as shown below.  
To delete an existing SNMP Host Table entry, click the corresponding ꢀ under the Delete heading.  
To display the current settings for an existing SNMP Group Table entry, click the blue link for the entry under the Host IP Address heading.  
Figure 8- 9. SNMP HostTable  
To add a new entry to the Switch's SNMP Host Table, click the Add button in the upper left-hand corner of the page.This will open the SNMP Host  
Table Configuration page, as shown below.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 8-10. SNMP HostTable Configuration window  
The following parameters can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Host IP Address  
SNMP Version  
Type the IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch.  
V1 –To specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used.  
V2 –To specify that SNMP version 2 will be used.  
V3-NoAuth-NoPriv –To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used, with a NoAuth-NoPriv security level.  
V3-Auth-NoPriv –To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used, with an Auth-NoPriv security level.  
V3-Auth-Priv –To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used, with an Auth-Priv security level.  
Community String or  
SNMP V3 User Name  
Type in the community string or SNMPV3 user name as appropriate.  
To implement your new settings, click Apply.To return to the SNMP Host Table, click the Show All SNMP HostTable Entries link.  
SNMP Engine ID  
The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMPV3 implementations.This is an alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch.  
To display the Switch's SNMP Engine ID, open the SNMP Manager folder and click on the SNMP Engine ID link.This will open the SNMP Engine ID  
Configuration window, as shown below.  
Figure 8-11. SNMP Engine ID Configuration window  
To change the Engine ID, type the new Engine ID in the space provided and click the Apply button.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9 - Monitoring  
9-1 Port Utilization  
The Port Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port.  
To view the port utilization, open the Monitoring folder and then the Port Utilization link:  
Figure 9- 1. Port Utilization window  
To select a port to view these statistics for, first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select the port by using the  
Port pull down menu.The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
Record Number  
Click Clear to refresh the graph. Click Apply to set changes implemented.  
9-2 CPU Utilization  
The CPU Utilization displays the percentage of the CPU being used, expressed as an integer percentage and calculated as a simple average by time interval.To  
view the CPU Utilization window, open the Monitoring folder and click the CPU Utilization link.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 2. CPU Utilization graph  
Click Apply to implement the configured settings.The window will automatically refresh with new updated statistics.  
The information is described as follows:  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Record Number  
Utilization  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
Check whether or not to display Utilization.  
9-3 Packets  
TheWeb Manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table. Six windows are offered.  
Received (RX)  
Click the Received (RX) link in the Packets folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of packets received on the Switch.To select a port  
to view these statistics for, first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down  
menu.The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 3. Rx Packets Analysis window (line graph for Bytes and Packets)  
To view the Received Packets Table, click the link View Table, which will show the following table:  
Figure 9- 4. Rx Packets Analysis window (table for Bytes and Packets)  
The following fields may be set or viewed:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Record Number  
Bytes  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
Counts the number of bytes received on the port.  
Packets  
Counts the number of packets received on the port.  
Unicast  
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address.  
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address.  
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address.  
Check whether to display Bytes and Packets.  
Multicast  
Broadcast  
Show/Hide  
Clear  
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.  
ViewTable  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.  
Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.  
View Line  
UMB Cast (RX)  
Click the UMB Cast (RX) link in the Packets folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of UMB cast packets received on the Switch.To  
select a port to view these statistics for, first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select the port by using the Port  
pull down menu.The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.  
Figure 9- 5. Rx Packets Analysis window (line graph for Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast Packets)  
To view the UMB Cast Table, click the View Table link, which will show the following table:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 6. Rx Packets Analysis window (table for Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast Packets)  
The following fields may be set or viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Record Number  
Unicast  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address.  
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address.  
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address.  
Check whether or not to display Multicast, Broadcast, and Unicast Packets.  
Multicast  
Broadcast  
Show/Hide  
Clear  
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.  
ViewTable  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.  
Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.  
View Line  
Transmitted (TX)  
Click the Transmitted (TX) link in the Packets folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of packets transmitted from the Switch.To  
select a port to view these statistics for, first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select the port by using the Port  
pull down menu.The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 7.Tx Packets Analysis window (line graph for Bytes and Packets)  
To view the Transmitted (TX) Table, click the link ViewTable, which will show the following table:  
Figure 9- 8.Tx Packets Analysis window (table for Bytes and Packets)  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following fields may be set or viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Record Number  
Bytes  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
Counts the number of bytes successfully sent from the port.  
Packets  
Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port.  
Unicast  
Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a unicast address.  
Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a multicast address.  
Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a broadcast address.  
Check whether or not to display Bytes and Packets.  
Multicast  
Broadcast  
Show/Hide  
Clear  
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.  
ViewTable  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.  
View Line Chart  
9-4 Errors  
TheWeb Manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch's management agent to be viewed as either a line graph or a table. Four windows are  
offered.  
Received (RX)  
Click the Received (RX) link in the Error folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of error packets received on the Switch.To select a  
port to view these statistics for, first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down  
menu.The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.  
Figure 9- 9. Rx Error Analysis window (line graph)  
To view the Received Error Packets Table, click the link View Table, which will show the following table:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 10. Rx Error Analysis window (table)  
The following fields can be set:  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Record Number  
Crc Error  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte (octet) boundary.  
Under Size  
The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64 bytes and have a  
good CRC. Undersize packets usually indicate collision fragments, a normal network occurrence.  
Over Size  
Fragment  
Jabber  
Counts packets received that were longer than 1518 octets, or if aVLAN frame is 1522 octets, and less than  
the MAX_PKT_LEN. Internally, MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1522.  
The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an invalid CRC.These are normally the  
result of collisions.  
The number of packets with lengths more than the MAX_PKT_LEN bytes. Internally, MAX_PKT_LEN is equal  
to 1522.  
Drop  
The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot.  
Check whether or not to display Crc Error, Under Size, Over Size, Fragment, Jabber, and Drop errors.  
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.  
Show/Hide  
Clear  
ViewTable  
View Line  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.  
Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.  
Transmitted (TX)  
Click theTransmitted (TX) link in the Error folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of error packets received on the Switch.To select a port  
to view these statistics for, first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down  
menu.The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 11.Tx Error Analysis window (line graph)  
To view the Transmitted Error Packets Table, click the link ViewTable, which will show the following table:  
Figure 9- 12.Tx Error Analysis window (table)  
The following fields may be set or viewed:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Record Number  
ExDefer  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface was delayed  
because the medium was busy.  
LateColl  
Counts the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a  
packet.  
ExColl  
Excessive Collisions.The number of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions.  
SingColl  
Single Collision Frames.The number of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by  
more than one collision.  
Coll  
An estimate of the total number of collisions on this network segment.  
Check whether or not to display ExDefer, LateColl, ExColl, SingColl, and Coll errors.  
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.  
Show/Hide  
Clear  
View Table  
View Line  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.  
Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.  
9-5 Size  
TheWeb Manager allows packets received by the Switch, arranged in six groups and classed by size, to be viewed as either a line graph or a table.Two windows  
are offered.To select a port to view these statistics for, first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull-down menu and then select the port by  
using the Port pull down menu.The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a  
port.  
Figure 9- 13. Rx Size Analysis window (line graph)  
To view the Packet Size Analysis Table, click the link ViewTable, which will show the following table:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 14. Rx Size Analysis window (table)  
The following fields can be set or viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Time Interval  
Record Number  
64  
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200.The default value is 200.  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing  
bits but including FCS octets).  
65-127  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length  
inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
128-255  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length  
inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
256-511  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length  
inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
Show/Hide  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length  
inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in  
length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
Check whether or not to display 64, 65-127, 128-255, 256-511, 512-1023, and 1024 1518 packets received  
1024-1518 packets received.  
Clear  
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.  
ViewTable  
View Line Chart  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.  
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.  
Stacking Information  
To change a switch’s default stacking configuration (for example, the order in the stack), see Box Information in the Configuration folder.  
The number of switches in the switch stack (up to 12 total) are displayed in the upper right-hand corner of your web-browser.The icons are in the same order  
as their respective Unit numbers, with the Unit 1 switch corresponding to the icon in the upper left-most corner of the icon group.  
When the switches are properly interconnected through their optional Stacking Modules, information about the resulting switch stack is displayed under the  
Stack Information link.  
To view the stacking information, click on the Stacking Information link from the Monitoring folder:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 15. Stacking Information window  
The Stacking Information window holds the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
Box ID  
User Set  
Type  
Displays the Switch’s order in the stack.  
Box ID can be assigned automatically (Auto), or can be assigned statically. Default is Auto.  
Displays the model name of the corresponding switch in a stack.  
Denotes whether a switch does or does not exist in a stack.  
Exist  
Priority  
Displays the priority ID of the Switch.The lower the number, the higher the priority.The box (switch) with the  
lowest priority number in the stack denotes the Master switch.The AT-9724TS will always be the master switch  
in a Star topology.  
Prom Version  
Shows the PROM in use for the Switch.This may be different from the values shown in the illustration.  
Runtime Version  
Shows the firmware version in use for the Switch.This may be different from the values shown in the  
illustrations.  
H/W Version  
Shows the hardware version in use for the Switch.This may be different from the values shown in the  
illustration.  
Topology  
Show the current topology employed using this Switch.  
Displays the Box ID of the Switch currently in use.  
My Box ID  
Current State  
Box Count  
Displays the current stacking state of the Switch, which may be MASTER or SLAVE.  
Displays the number of switches in the switch stack.  
Device Status  
The Device Status window can be found in the Monitoring menu by clicking the Device Status link.This window shows the status of the physical  
attributes of the Switch, including power sources and fans.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 16. Device Status window  
The following fields may be viewed in this window:  
Parameter  
Description  
ID  
The Box ID of the Switch in the switch stack.  
Internal Power  
A read only field denoting the current status of the internal power supply.Active will suggest the mechanism is  
functioning correctly while Fail will show the mechanism is not functioning correctly.  
External Power  
A read only field denoting the current status of the external power supply.Active will suggest the mechanism is  
functioning correctly while Fail will show the mechanism is not functioning correctly.  
Side Fan  
Back Fan  
A read only field denoting if the side fan of the Switch is functioning properly.  
A read only field denoting if the back fan of the Switch is functioning properly.  
9-6 MAC Address  
This allows the Switch's dynamic MAC address forwarding table to be viewed.When the Switch learns an association between a MAC address and a port  
number, it makes an entry into its forwarding table.These entries are then used to forward packets through the Switch.  
To view the MAC Address forwarding table, from the Monitoring menu, click the MAC Address link:  
Figure 9- 17. MAC AddressTable  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following fields can be viewed or set:  
Parameter  
Description  
VLAN Name  
MAC Address  
Unit – Port  
Enter aVLAN Name for the forwarding table to be browsed by.  
Enter a MAC address for the forwarding table to be browsed by.  
Select the switch Unit ID of the switch in the Switch stack and then the port by using the corresponding pull-  
down menus.  
Find  
Allows the user to move to a sector of the database corresponding to a user defined port,VLAN, or MAC  
address.  
VID  
TheVLAN ID of theVLAN the port is a member of.  
MAC Address  
The MAC address entered into the address table.  
Unit  
Refers to the Unit of the switch stack that the MAC address was learned from.  
The port that the MAC address above corresponds to.  
Port  
Type  
How the Switch discovered the MAC address.The possible entries are Dynamic, Self, and Static.  
Click this button to view the next page of the address table.  
Next  
Clear Dynamic Entry  
Clicking this button will clear Dynamic entries learned by the Switch.This may be accomplished byVLAN Name  
or by Port.  
View All Entry  
Clear All Entry  
Clicking this button will allow the user to view all entries of the address table.  
Clicking this button will allow the user to delete all entries of the address table.  
9-7 Switch History Log  
TheWeb manager allows the Switch's history log, as compiled by the Switch's management agent, to be viewed.To view the Switch history log, open the  
Monitoring folder and click the Switch History Log link.  
Figure 9- 18. Switch History window  
The Switch can record event information in its own logs, to designated SNMP trap receiving stations, and to the PC connected to the console manager. Click  
Next to go to the next page of the Switch History Log. Clicking Clear will allow the user to clear the Switch History Log.  
The information is described as follows:  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Sequence  
Description  
A counter incremented whenever an entry to the Switch's history log is made.The table displays the last entry  
(highest sequence number) first.  
Time  
Displays the time in days, hours, and minutes since the Switch was last restarted.  
Displays text describing the event that triggered the history log entry.  
Log Text  
9-8 IGMP Snooping Group  
This window allows the Switch’s IGMP Snooping Table to be viewed. IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and the  
corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch.The number of IGMP reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reports  
field.  
To view the IGMP Snooping table, click IGMP Snooping Group on the Monitoring menu:  
Figure 9- 19. IGMP Snooping GroupTable  
The user may search the IGMP Snooping Table byVLAN Name by entering it in the top left hand corner and clicking Search.  
The following field can be viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
VLAN Name  
Multicast Group  
MAC Address  
Reports  
TheVLAN Name of the multicast group.  
The IP address of the multicast group.  
The MAC address of the multicast group.  
The total number of reports received for this group.  
These are the ports where the IGMP packets were snooped are displayed.  
Port Member  
Note:  
To configure IGMP snooping for the AT-9724TS, go to the Configuration folder and select IGMP Snooping. Configuration and other  
information concerning IGMP snooping may be found in Section 6 of this manual under IGMP.  
9-9 IGMP Snooping Forwarding  
This window will display the current IGMP snooping forwarding table entries currently configured on the Switch.To view the following screen, open the  
Monitoring folder and click the IGMP Snooping Forwarding link.  
Figure 9- 20. IGMP Snooping ForwardingTable  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The user may search the IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table byVLAN Name using the top left hand corner Search.  
The following fields can be viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
VLAN Name  
Source IP  
TheVLAN Name of the multicast group.  
The Source IP address of the multicast group.  
The IP address of the multicast group.  
Multicast Group  
Port Map  
These are the ports where the IP multicast packets are being forwarded to.  
9-10 Browse Router Port  
This displays which of the Switch’s ports are currently configured as router ports.A router port configured by a user (using the console orWeb-based  
management interfaces) is displayed as a static router port, designated by S.A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D.  
Figure 9- 21. Browse Router Port window  
9-11 Port Access Control  
The following screens are used to monitor 802.1x statistics of the Switch, on a per port basis.To view the Port Access Control screens, open the monitoring  
folder and click the Port Access Control folder.There are six screens to monitor.  
Note:  
802.1X must be enabled under Configuration > Advanced Settings.  
Authenticator State  
The following section describes the 802.1X Status on the Switch.To view the Authenticator State, click Monitoring > Port Access Control >  
Authenticator State.  
Figure 9- 22.Authenticator State window – Port Based 802.1x  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 23.Authenticator State – MAC Based 802.1X  
This window displays the Authenticator State for individual ports on a selected device.To select unit within the switch stack, use the pull-down menu at the  
top of the window and click Apply.A polling interval between 1 and 60 seconds can be set using the drop-down menu at the top of the window and clicking  
OK.  
The information on this window is described as follows:  
Parameter  
Description  
Auth PAE State  
The Authenticator PAE State value can be: Initialize, Disconnected, Connecting, Authenticating, Authenticated,  
Aborting, Held, Force_Auth, Force_Unauth, or N/A. N/A (Not Available) indicates that the port's authenticator  
capability is disabled.  
Backend State  
The Backend Authentication State can be Request, Response, Success, Fail, Timeout, Idle, Initialize, or N/A.  
N/A (Not Available) indicates that the port's authenticator capability is disabled.  
Port Status  
Controlled Port Status can be Authorized, Unauthorized, or N/A.  
MAC Address  
Displays the MAC address of the Authenticator. Up to 16 MAC address can be implemented for MAC based  
802.1x.  
Authenticator Statistics  
This table contains the statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port.An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the  
Authenticator function.To view the Authenticator Statistics, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > Authenticator Statistics.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 24.Authenticator Statistics window  
The user can specify a switch in a switch stack using that switch’s Unit ID by using the pull down menu in the top left hand corner.The user may also select the  
desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where “s” stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
The following fields can be viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Port  
The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides.  
The number of valid EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator.  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.  
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator.  
The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.  
The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator.  
Frames Rx  
Frames Tx  
Rx Start  
TxReqId  
RxLogOff  
Tx Req  
The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been transmitted by this  
Authenticator.  
Rx RespId  
Rx Resp  
The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator.  
The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames) that have been received by this  
Authenticator.  
Rx Invalid  
Rx Error  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not  
recognized.  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length  
field is invalid.  
Last Version  
Last Source  
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.  
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
Authenticator Session Statistics  
This table contains the session statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port.An entry appears in this table for each port that supports  
the Authenticator function.To view the Authenticator Session Statistics, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > Authenticator Session  
Statistics.  
Figure 9- 25.Authenticator Session Statistics window  
The user can specify a switch in a switch stack using that switch’s Unit ID by using the pull down menu in the top left hand corner.The user may also select the  
desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where “s” stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
The following fields can be viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Port  
The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides.  
The number of octets received in user data frames on this port during the session.  
The number of octets transmitted in user data frames on this port during the session.  
The number of user data frames received on this port during the session.  
Octets Rx  
Octets Tx  
Frames Rx  
Frames Tx  
ID  
The number of user data frames transmitted on this port during the session.  
A unique identifier for the session, in the form of a printable ASCII string of at least three characters.  
The authentication method used to establish the session.Valid Authentic Methods include:  
Remote Authentic Server –The Authentication Server is external to the Authenticator’s System.  
Local Authentic Server –The Authentication Server is located within the Authenticator’s System.  
The duration of the session in seconds.  
Authentic Method  
Time  
Terminate Cause  
The reason for the session termination.There are eight possible reasons for termination.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Supplicant Logoff  
Port Failure  
Supplicant Restart  
Reauthentication Failure  
AuthControlledPortControl set to ForceUnauthorized  
Port re-initialization  
Port Administratively Disabled  
NotTerminatedYet  
UserName  
The User-Name representing the identity of the Supplicant PAE.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
Authenticator Diagnostics  
This table contains the diagnostic information regarding the operation of the Authenticator associated with each port.An entry appears in this table for each  
port that supports the Authenticator function.To view the Authenticator Diagnostics, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > Authenticator  
Diagnostics.  
Figure 9- 26.Authenticator Diagnostics window  
The user can specify a switch in a switch stack using that switch’s Unit ID by using the pull down menu in the top left hand corner.The user may also select the  
desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where “s” stands for seconds.The default value is one second.  
The following fields can be viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
Port  
The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides.  
Connect Enter  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other  
state.  
Connect LogOff  
Auth Enter  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as  
a result of receiving an EAPOL-Logoff message.  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING,  
as a result of an EAP-Response/Identity message being received from the Supplicant.  
Auth Success  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to  
AUTHENTICATED, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication  
of the Supplicant (authSuccess =TRUE).  
Auth Timeout  
Auth Fail  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a  
result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout (authTimeout =TRUE).  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD, as a result  
of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure (authFail =TRUE).  
Auth Reauth  
Auth Start  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a  
result of a reauthentication request (reAuthenticate =TRUE).  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a  
result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant.  
Auth LogOff  
Authed Reauth  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a  
result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant.  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING, as  
a result of a reauthentication request (reAuthenticate =TRUE).  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
Authed Start  
Authed LogOff  
Responses  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING, as  
a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant.  
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED,  
as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant.  
Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access-Request packet to the  
Authentication server (i.e., executes sendRespToServer on entry to the RESPONSE state). Indicates that the  
Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server.  
AccessChallenges  
OtherReqToSupp  
NonNakRespFromSup  
Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access-Challenge packet from the  
Authentication server (i.e., aReq becomesTRUE, causing exit from the RESPONSE state). Indicates that the  
Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator.  
Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an EAP-Request packet (other than an Identity,  
Notification, Failure, or Success message) to the Supplicant (i.e., executes txReq on entry to the REQUEST  
state). Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP-method.  
Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP-  
Request, and the response is something other than EAP-NAK (i.e., rxResp becomesTRUE, causing the state  
machine to transition from REQUEST to RESPONSE, and the response is not an EAP-NAK). Indicates that the  
Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator’s chosen EAP-method.  
Bac Auth Success  
Bac Auth Fail  
Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server  
(i.e., aSuccess becomesTRUE, causing a transition from RESPONSE to SUCCESS). Indicates that the Supplicant  
has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server.  
Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server  
(i.e., aFail becomesTRUE, causing a transition from RESPONSE to FAIL). Indicates that the Supplicant has not  
authenticated to the Authentication Server.  
RADIUS Authentication  
This table contains information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authentication client on the client side of the RADIUS authentication protocol. It has one  
row for each RADIUS authentication server that the client shares a secret with.To view the RADIUS Authentication, click Monitoring > Port Access  
Control > RADIUS Authentication.  
Figure 9- 27. RADIUS Authentication window  
The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where “s” stands for seconds.The default value is one second.To  
clear the current statistics shown, click the Clear button in the top left hand corner.  
The following fields can be viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
ServerIndex  
InvalidServerAddr  
Identifier  
The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client shares a secret with.  
The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets received from unknown addresses.  
The NAS-Identifier of the RADIUS authentication client. (This is not necessarily the same as sysName in MIB  
II.)  
AuthServerAddr  
ServerPortNumber  
RoundTripTime  
The (conceptual) table listing the RADIUS authentication servers with which the client shares a secret.  
The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server.  
The time interval (in hundredths of a second) between the most recent Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and the  
Access-Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server.  
AccessRequests  
AccessRetrans  
AccessAccepts  
AccessRejects  
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to this server.This does not include retransmissions.  
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server.  
The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets (valid or invalid) received from this server.  
The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets (valid or invalid) received from this server.  
The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets (valid or invalid) received from this server.  
AccessChallenges  
AccessResponses  
The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets received from this server. Malformed packets  
include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or known types are not  
included as malformed access responses.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BadAuthenticators  
PendingRequests  
The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes  
received from this server.  
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or  
received a response.This variable is incremented when an Access-Request is sent and decremented due to  
receipt of an Access-Accept,Access-Reject or Access-Challenge, a timeout or retransmission.  
Timeouts  
The number of authentication timeouts to this server.After a timeout the client may retry to the same server,  
send to a different server, or give up.A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout.  
A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout.  
UnknownTypes  
PacketsDropped  
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication  
port  
The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and  
dropped for some other reason.  
RADIUS Accounting  
This window shows managed objects used for managing RADIUS accounting clients, and the current statistics associated with them. It has one row for each  
RADIUS authentication server that the client shares a secret with.To view the RADIUS Accounting, click Monitoring > Port Access Control >  
RADIUS Accounting.  
Figure 9- 28. RADIUS Accounting window  
The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where “s” stands for seconds.The default value is one second.To  
clear the current statistics shown, click the Clear button in the top left hand corner.  
The following fields can be viewed:  
Parameter  
Description  
ServerIndex  
The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that the client shares a secret with.  
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets received from unknown addresses.  
The NAS-Identifier of the RADIUS accounting client. (This is not necessarily the same as sysName in MIB II.)  
The (conceptual) table listing the RADIUS accounting servers with which the client shares a secret.  
The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server.  
InvalidServerAddr  
Identifier  
ServerAddress  
ServerPortNumber  
RoundTripTime  
The time interval between the most recent Accounting-Response and the Accounting-Request that matched it  
from this RADIUS accounting server.  
Requests  
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent.This does not include retransmissions.  
Retransmissions  
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server.  
Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct-Delay have been updated, as well as those in  
which they remain the same.  
Responses  
The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server.  
MalformedResponses  
The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting-Response packets received from this server. Malformed packets  
include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed  
accounting responses.  
BadAuthenticators  
PendingRequests  
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets, which contained invalid authenticators, received from  
this server.  
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or  
received a response.This variable is incremented when an Accounting-Request is sent and decremented due to  
receipt of an Accounting-Response, a timeout or a retransmission.  
Timeouts  
The number of accounting timeouts to this server.After a timeout the client may retry to the same server, send  
to a different server, or give up.A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout.A  
send to a different server is counted as an Accounting-Request as well as a timeout.  
UnknownTypes  
PacketsDropped  
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting  
port.  
The number of RADIUS packets, which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for  
some other reason.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
Note:  
To configure 802.1x features for the AT-9724TS, go to the Configuration folder and select Port Access Entity. Configuration  
and other information concerning 802.1x may be found in Section 6 of this manual under Port Access Entity.  
9-12 Layer 3 Feature  
This folder in the Monitoring section will display information concerning settings configured in Layer 3 IP Networking of the Configuration folder.  
These settings and parameters have been previously described in Chapter 6 of this manual, under Layer 3 IP Networking.  
Browse IP Address  
The Browse IP Address window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder.The Browse IP Address window is a read  
only screen where the user may view IP addresses discovered by the Switch.To search a specific IP address, enter it into the field labelled IP Address at the top  
of the screen and click Find to begin your search.  
Figure 9- 29. Browse IP AddressTable  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Routing Table  
The Browse Routing Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder.This screen shows the current IP routing  
table of the Switch.To find a specific IP route, enter an IP address into the Destination Address field along with a proper subnet mask into the Mask field  
and click Find.  
Figure 9- 30. Browse RoutingTable window  
Browse ARP Table  
The Browse ARP Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder.This window will show current ARP entries on  
the Switch.To search a specific ARP entry, enter an interface name into the Interface Name or an IP address and click Find.To clear the ARPTable, click  
Clear All.  
Figure 9- 31. Browse ARPTable window  
Browse IP Multicast Forwarding Table  
The Browse IP Multicast Forwarding Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder.This window will show  
current IP multicasting information on the Switch.To search a specific entry, enter an multicast group IP address into the Multicast Group field or a Source  
IP address and click Find.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9- 32. Browse IP Multicast ForwardingTable  
Browse IGMP Group Table  
The Browse IGMP Group Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder.This window will show current IGMP  
group entries on the Switch.To search a specific IGMP group entry, enter an interface name into the Interface Name field or a Multicast Group IP  
address and click Find.  
Figure 9- 33. Browse IGMP GroupTable  
OSPF Monitoring  
This section offers windows regarding OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) information on the Switch, including the OSPF LSDB Table, OSPF Neighbor  
Table and the OSPF Virtual Neighbor Table.To view these tables, open the Monitoring folder and click OSPF Monitoring.  
Browse OSPF LSDB Table  
This table can be found in the OSPF Monitoring folder by clicking on the Browse OSPF LSDB Table link.The OSPF Link-State Database Table  
displays the current link-state database in use by the OSPF routing protocol on a per-OSPF area basis.  
Figure 9- 34. Browse OSPF LSDBTable  
The user may search for a specific entry by entering the following information into the fields at the top of the screen:  
To browse the OSPF LSDB Table, you first must select which browse method you want to use in the Search Type field.The choices are All, Area ID,  
Advertise Router ID, LSDB,Area ID & Advertise Router ID, Area ID & LSDB, and Advertise Router ID & LSDB.  
If Area ID is selected as the browse method, you must enter the IP address in the Area ID field, and then click Find.  
If Adv. Router ID is selected, you must enter the IP address in the Advertisement Router ID field, and then click Find.  
If LSDB is selected, you must select the type of link state (RtrLink, NetLink, Summary, ASSummary and ASExtLink) in the LSDB Type field, and then click Find.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following fields are displayed in the OSPF LSDB Table:  
Parameter  
Area ID  
Description  
Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID.This Area ID will then be used to search the table, and display an entry –  
if there is one.  
LSDB Type  
Displays which one of eight types of link advertisements by which the current link was discovered by the  
Switch: All, Router link (RTRLink), Network link (NETLink), Summary link (Summary),Autonomous System link  
(ASSummary),Autonomous System external link (ASExternal), MCGLink (Multicast Group), and NSSA (Not So  
Stubby Area)  
Adv. Router ID  
Link State  
Displays the Advertising Router’s ID.  
IDThis field identifies the portion of the Internet environment that is being described by the advertisement.  
The contents of this field depend on the advertisement's LS type.  
LS Type  
LinkState ID  
1
2
3
4
The originating router's Router ID.  
The IP interface address of the network's Designated Router.  
The destination network's IP address.  
The Router ID of the described AS boundary router.  
Cost  
Displays the cost of the table entry.  
Sequence  
Displays a sequence number corresponding to number of times the current link has been advertised as  
changed.  
Browse OSPF Neighbor Table  
This table can be found in the OSPF Monitoring folder by clicking on the Browse OSPF Neighbor Table link. Routers that are connected to the same  
area or segment become neighbors in that area. Neighbors are elected via the Hello protocol. IP multicast is used to send out Hello packets to other routers on  
the segment. Routers become neighbors when they see themselves listed in a Hello packet sent by another router on the same segment. In this way, two-way  
communication is guaranteed to be possible between any two neighbor routers.This table displays OSPF neighbors of the Switch.  
Figure 9- 35. OSPF NeighborTable  
To search for OSPF neighbors, enter an IP address and click Find.Valid OSPF neighbors will appear in the OSPF Neighbor Table below.  
OSPF Virtual Neighbor  
This table can be found in the OSPF Monitoring folder by clicking on the Browse OSPF Virtual Neighbor link.This table displays a list of Virtual  
OSPF Neighbors of the Switch.The user may choose specifically search a virtual neighbor by using one of the two search options at the top of the screen,  
which are:  
Parameter  
Description  
Transit Area ID  
Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID – previously defined on the Switch – that allows a remote area to  
communicate with the backbone (area 0).ATransit Area cannot be a Stub Area or a Backbone Area.  
Neighbor ID  
The OSPF router ID for the remote router.This IP address uniquely identifies the remote area’s Area Border  
Router.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
Figure 9- 36 .OSPFVirtual NeighborTable  
DVMRP Monitoring  
This menu allows the DVMRP (Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol) to be monitored for each IP interface defined on the Switch.This folder, found in  
the Monitoring folder, offers 3 screens for monitoring; Browse DVMRP Routing Table, Browse DVMRP Neighbor Address Table and Browse  
DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table. Information on DVMRP and its features in relation to the AT-9724TS can be found in Chapter 6, under IP Multicast  
Routing Protocol.  
Browse DVMRP Routing Table  
Multicast routing information is gathered and stored by DVMRP in the DVMRP Routing Table, which may be found in the Monitoring folder under  
Browse DVMRP Monitoring, contains one row for each port in a DVMRP mode. Each routing entry contains information about the source and multicast  
group, and incoming and outgoing interfaces.You may define your search by entering a Source IP Address and its subnet mask into the fields at the top of the  
page.  
Figure 9- 37 . DVMRP RoutingTable  
Browse DVMRP Neighbor Address Table  
This table, found in the Monitoring menu under DVMRP Monitor > Browse DVMRP Neighbor Address Table contains information about  
DVMRP neighbors of the Switch.To search this table, enter either an Interface Name or Neighbor Address into the respective field and click the Find  
button. DVMRP neighbors of that entry will appear in the DVMRP Neighbor Table below.  
Figure 9- 38. DVMRP NeighborTable  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table  
The DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table contains information regarding the next-hop for forwarding multicast packets on outgoing interfaces. Each entry in  
the DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table refers to the next-hop of a specific source to a specific multicast group address.This table is found in the  
Monitoring menu under DVMRP Monitoring, with the heading Browse DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table.To search this table, enter either an  
Interface Name or Source IP Address into the respective field and click the Find button.The next hop of that DVMRP Routing entry will appear in the  
DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table below.  
Figure 9- 39. DVMRP Routing Next HopTable  
PIM Monitoring  
Multicast routers use Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) to determine which other multicast routers should receive multicast packets.To find out  
more information concerning PIM and its configuration on the Switch, see the IP Multicasting chapter of Chapter 6, Configuration.  
PIM Neighbor Address Table  
The PIM Neighbor Address Table contains information regarding each of a router’s PIM neighbors.This screen may be found in the Monitoring folder  
under the heading PIM Monitor.To search this table, enter either an Interface Name or Neighbor Address into the respective field and click the Find  
button. PIM neighbors of that entry will appear in the PIM Neighbor Table below.  
Figure 9- 40. PIM NeighborTable  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10 - Switch Maintenance  
10-1TFTP Services  
10-2 Multiple Image Services  
10-3 CF Services  
10-4 PingTest  
10-5 Save Changes  
10-6 Reset  
10-7 Reboot Services  
10-8 Logout  
10-1 TFTP Service  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) services allow the Switch’s firmware to be upgraded by transferring a new firmware file from aTFTP server to the  
Switch.A configuration file can also be loaded into the Switch from aTFTP server, switch settings can be saved to theTFTP server, and a history log can be  
uploaded from the Switch to theTFTP server.  
Download Firmware  
To update the Switch’s firmware, open the TFTP Services folder in the Maintenance folder and then click the Download Firmware link:  
Figure 10- 1. Download Firmware window  
Unit ID – Select which switch of a switch stack you want to update the firmware on.This allows the selection of a particular switch from a switch stack if you  
have installed the optional stacking module and have properly interconnected the switches. All indicates all switches in a switch stack will download the same  
firmware.  
Enter the IP address of theTFTP server in the Server IP Address field.  
Select the Image ID of the firmware.The AT-9724TS can hold two firmware images in its memory. Image ID 1 will always be the boot up firmware for the Switch  
unless specified by the user. Information on configuring Image IDs can be found in this section, under the heading MULTIPLE IMAGE Services.  
TheTFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch.  
Enter the path and the filename to the firmware file on theTFTP server. Note that in the above example, the firmware file is in the root directory of the D drive  
of theTFTP server.  
TheTFTP server must be runningTFTP server software to perform the file transfer.TFTP server software is a part of many network management software  
packages – such as NetSight, or can be obtained as a separate program.  
Click Start to record the IP address of theTFTP server and begin the file transfer.  
Download Configuration File  
To download a configuration file from aTFTP server, click on the TFTP Service folder in the Maintenance folder and then the Download  
Configuration File link:  
Figure 10- 2. Download Configuration File window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enter the IP address of theTFTP server and specify the location of the switch configuration file on theTFTP server.  
Click Start to initiate the file transfer.  
Upload Configuration  
To upload the Switch’s settings to aTFTP server, click on the TFTP Service folder in the Maintenance folder and then click the Save Settings link:  
Figure 10- 3. Upload Configuration window  
Enter the IP address of theTFTP server and the path and filename for the configuration file on theTFTP server.  
Click Start to initiate the file transfer.  
Upload Log  
To upload the Switch history log file to aTFTP server, open the TFTP Service folder in the Maintenance folder and then click the Upload Log link:  
Figure 10- 4. Upload Log window  
Enter the IP address of theTFTP server and the path and filename for the history log on theTFTP server.  
Click Start to record the IP address of theTFTP server and to initiate the file transfer.  
10-2 Multiple Image Services  
The Multiple Image Services folder allow users of the AT-9724TS to configure and view information regarding firmware located on the Switch.The Switch  
allows two firmware images to be stored in its memory and either can be configured to be the boot up firmware for the Switch. For information regarding  
firmware images located on the Switch, open the Firmware Information link.The default setting for the Switch’s firmware will have the boot up firmware  
stored in Image 1, but the user may set either firmware stored to be the boot up firmware by using the Config Firmware Image window.  
Firmware Information  
The following screen allows the user to view information about current firmware images stored on the Switch.To access the following screen, click  
Maintenance > MULTIPLE IMAGE Services > Firmware Information.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 10- 5. Firmware Information window  
This window holds the following information:  
Parameter  
Description  
BOX  
ID  
States the stacking ID number of the switch in the switch stack.  
States the image ID number of the firmware in the Switch’s memory.The Switch can store 2 firmware images  
for use. Image ID 1 will be the default boot up firmware for the Switch unless otherwise configured by the user.  
Version  
Size  
States the firmware version.  
States the size of the corresponding firmware, in bytes.  
States the specific time the firmware version was downloaded to the Switch.  
Update Time  
From  
States the IP address of the origin of the firmware.There are four ways firmware may be downloaded to the  
Switch.  
R – If the IP address has this letter attached to it, it denotes a firmware upgrade through the Console Serial  
Port (RS-232).  
T – If the IP address has this letter attached to it, it denotes a firmware upgrade throughTelnet.  
S – If the IP address has this letter attached to it, it denotes a firmware upgrade through the Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP).  
W – If the IP address has this letter attached to it, it denotes a firmware upgrade through the web-based  
management interface.  
User  
States the user who downloaded the firmware.This field may read “Anonymous” or “Unknown” for users that  
are not identified.  
Config Firmware Image  
The Config Firmware Image window allows users to configure firmware images saved in the memory of the Switch.To access the following window, click  
Maintenance > MULTIPLE IMAGE Services > Config Firmware Image.  
Figure 10- 6. Config Firmware Image window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This window offers the following information:  
Parameter  
Image  
Description  
Select the firmware image to be configured using the pull-down menu.The Switch allows two firmware images  
to be stored in the Switch’s memory.  
Active  
This field has two options for configuration.  
Delete – Select this option to delete the firmware image specified in the Image field above.  
Boot – Select this option to set the firmware image specified above as the boot up firmware for the Switch.This  
firmware will be set as the boot up firmware after a switch reboot has been performed.The default setting has  
firmware image ID 1 as the boot up firmware image for the Switch unless specified here.  
Click Apply to implement changes made.  
10-4 Ping Test  
Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IP address you specify.The destination node then responds to or "echoes" the packets sent from the  
Switch.This is very useful to verify connectivity between the Switch and other nodes on the network.  
Figure 10- 7. PingTest  
The user may use Infinite times radio button, in the Repeat Pinging for: field, which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the  
specified IP address until the program is stopped.The user may opt to choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by clicking its radio  
button and entering a number between 1 and 255.  
Click Start to initiate the Ping program.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-5 Save Changes  
The AT-9724TS has two levels of memory; normal RAM and non-volatile or NV-RAM. Configuration changes are made effective clicking the Apply button.When  
this is done, the settings will be immediately applied to the switching software in RAM, and will immediately take effect.  
Some settings, though, require you to restart the Switch before they will take effect. Restarting the Switch erases all settings in RAM and reloads the stored  
settings from the NV-RAM.Thus, it is necessary to save all setting changes to NV-RAM before rebooting the switch.  
To retain any configuration changes permanently, click on the Save button in the Save Changes page, as shown below.  
Figure 10- 8. Save Changes Screen  
The Switch has three levels of save, which are as follows:  
Parameter  
Description  
Save (Only save config)  
Clicking the radio button for this entry will save only the current switch configuration to NV-RAM.  
Clicking the radio button for this entry will save only the current current log file to NV- RAM.  
Save Log (Only save log)  
Save All (Save config and log)  
Clicking the radio button for this entry will save both the current switch configuration and the current log file  
to NV-RAM.  
These settings will be used every time the Switch is rebooted. See the Reset section for more information on changing configurations saved to NV-RAM.  
10-6 Reset  
The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch. Some of the current configuration parameters can be retained while resetting all other  
configuration parameters to their factory defaults.  
Note:  
Only the Reset System option will enter the factory default parameters into the Switch’s non-volatile RAM, and then restart the Switch.  
All other options enter the factory defaults into the current configuration, but do not save this configuration. Reset System will return the Switch’s  
configuration to the state it was when it left the factory.  
Figure 10- 9. Factory Reset to DefaultValue window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-7 Reboot Device  
The following menu is used to restart the Switch.  
Figure 10- 10. Restart System window  
Clicking the Yes click-box will instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non-volatile RAM before restarting the Switch.  
Clicking the No click-box instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch.All of the configuration information entered  
from the last time Save Changes was executed, will be lost.  
Click the Restart button to restart the Switch.  
10-8 Logout  
Use the Logout page to logout of the Switch’sWeb-based management agent by clicking on the Log Out button.  
Figure 10- 11 . Logout window  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A - Technical Specifications  
General  
Standard  
IEEE 802.3u 100TX Fast Ethernet  
IEEE 802.3ab 1000T Gigabit Ethernet  
IEEE 802.1 P/QVLAN  
IEEE 802.3x Full-duplex Flow Control  
IEEE 802.3 Nway auto-negotiation  
Protocols  
CSMA/CD  
Data Transfer Rates:  
Ethernet  
Half-duplex  
10Mbps  
Full-duplex  
20Mbps  
Fast Ethernet  
Gigabit Ethernet  
100Mbps  
1000Mbps  
200Mbps  
2000Mbps  
Fibre Optic  
IEC 793-2: 1992  
Type A1a - 50/125um multi-mode  
Type A1b - 62.5/125um multi-mode  
Both types use LC optical connector  
Topology  
Ring  
Network Cables  
UTP Cat.5 for 100Mbps  
UTP Cat.3, 4, 5 for 10Mbps  
EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm screened twisted-pair (STP)(100m)  
Physical & Environmental  
AC inputs & External  
Redundant Power Supply  
100 – 240VAC, 50/60 Hz (internal universal power supply)  
90 watts maximum  
Power Consumption:  
DC fans:  
2 built-in 40 x 40 x 10 mm fans; 1 built-in 60 x 60 x 18 mm fan  
0 to 40 degrees C  
Operating Temperature:  
Storage Temperature:  
Humidity:  
-25 to 55 degrees C  
Operating:  
Storage:  
5% to 95% RH non-condensing  
0% to 95% RH non-condensing  
Dimensions:  
Weight:  
EMC:  
441 mm x 207 mm x 44 mm (1U), 19 inch rackmount width  
3.15 kg  
FCC Part 15 Class A/ ICES-003 Class (Canada)  
EN55022 Class A / EN55024  
Safety:  
CSA International  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Performance  
Transmission Method:  
RAM Buffer:  
Store-and-forward  
2 MB per device  
Filtering Address Table:  
16 K MAC address per device  
Packet Filtering/  
Forwarding Rate:  
Full-wire speed for all connections.  
148,810 pps per port (for 100Mbps)  
1,488,100 pps per port (for 1000Mbps)  
MAC Address Learning:  
Automatic update.  
Forwarding Table Age Time:  
Max age: 10 – 1000000 seconds.  
Default = 300.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
Appendix B - Translated Electrical Safety and Emission Information  
Important: This appendix contains multiple-language translations for the safety statements in this guide.  
Wichtig: Dieser Anhang enthält Übersetzungen der in diesem Handbuch enthaltenen Sicherheitshinweise in mehreren Sprachen.  
Vigtigt: Dette tillæg indeholder oversættelser i flere sprog af sikkerhedsadvarslerne i denne håndbog.  
Belangrijk: Deze appendix bevat vertalingen in meerdere talen van de veiligheidsopmerkingen in deze gids.  
Important: Cette annexe contient la traduction en plusieurs langues des instructions de sécurité figurant dans ce guide.  
Tärkeää:Tämä liite sisältää tässä oppaassa esiintyvät turvaohjeet usealla kielellä.  
Importante: questa appendice contiene traduzioni in più lingue degli avvisi di sicurezza di questa guida.  
Viktig: Dette tillegget inneholder oversettelser til flere språk av sikkerhetsinformasjonen i denne veiledningen.  
Importante: Este anexo contém traduções em vários idiomas das advertências de segurança neste guia.  
Importante: Este apéndice contiene traducciones en múltiples idiomas de los mensajes de seguridad incluidos en esta guía.  
Obs! Denna bilaga innehåller flerspråkiga översättningar av säkerhetsmeddelandena i denna handledning.  
Standards:This product meets the following safety standards.  
1
ƽ
LIGHTNING DANGER  
DANGER: DO NOTWORK on equipment or CABLES during periods of LIGHTNING ACTIVITY.  
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
CAUTION: POWER CORD IS USED AS A DISCONNECTION DEVICE.TO DE-ENERGIZE EQUIPMENT, disconnect the power cord.  
ELECTRICAL – TYPE CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT  
THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE EARTHED. Power plug must be connected to a properly wired earth ground socket outlet.An  
improperly wired socket outlet could place hazardous voltages on accessible metal parts.  
4
5
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.  
CAUTION:Air vents must not be blocked and must have free access to the room ambient air for cooling.  
OPERATING TEMPERATURE:This product is designed for a maximum ambient temperature of 40° degrees C.  
ALL COUNTRIES: Install product in accordance with local and National Electrical Codes.  
Normen: Dieses Produkt erfüllt die Anforderungen der nachfolgenden Normen.  
1
Ꮨ
GEFAHR DURCH BLITZSCHLAG  
GEFAHR: Keine Arbeiten am Gerät oder an den Kabeln während eines Gewitters ausführen.  
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
VORSICHT: DAS NETZKABEL DIENT ZUMTRENNEN DER STROMVERSORGUNG. ZURTRENNUNGVOM NETZ, KABEL AUS  
DER STECKDOSE ZIEHEN.  
GERÄTE DER KLASSE 1  
DIESE GERÄTE MÜSSEN GEERDET SEIN. Der Netzstecker darf nur mit einer vorschriftsmäßig geerdeten Steckdose verbunden  
werden. Ein unvorschriftsmäßiger Anschluß kann die Metallteile des Gehauses unter gefährliche elektrische Spannungen setzen.  
4
5
ƽ
ƽ
STECKBARES GERÄT: Die Anschlußbuchse sollte in der Nähe der Einrichtung angebrachtwerden und leicht zugänglich sein.  
VORSICHT  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Die Entlüftungsöffnungen dürfen nicht versperrt sein und müssen zum Kühlen freien Zugang zur Raumluft haben.  
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
BETRIEBSTEMPERATUR: Dieses Produkt wurde für den Betrieb in einer Umgebungstemperatur von nicht mehr als 40° C  
entworfen.  
ALLE LÄNDER: Installation muß örtlichen und nationalen elektrischenVorschriften entsprechen.  
Standarder: Dette produkt tilfredsstiller de følgende standarder.  
1
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
FARE UNDER UVEJR  
FARE: UNDLAD at arbejde på udstyr eller KABLER i perioder med LYNAKTIVITET.  
ADVARSEL: DEN STRØMFØRENDE LEDNING BRUGESTIL AT AFBRYDE STRØMMEN.  
SKAL STRØMMENTIL APPARATET AFBRYDES, tages ledningen ud af stikket.  
ELEKTRISK – KLASSE 1-UDSTYR  
DETTE UDSTYR KRÆVER JORDFORBINDELSE. Stikket skal være forbundet med en korrekt installeret jordforbunden  
stikkontakt. En ukorrekt installeret stikkontakt kan sætte livsfarlig spænding til tilgængelige metaldele.  
4
5
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
UDSTYR TIL STIKKONTAKT, stikkontakten bør installeres nær ved udstyret og skal være let tilgængelig.  
ADVARSEL: Ventilationsåbninger må ikke blokeres og skal have fri adgang til den omgivende luft i rummet for afkøling.  
BETJENINGSTEMPERATUR: Dette apparat er konstrueret til en omgivende temperatur på maksimum 40 grader C.  
ALLE LANDE: Installation af produktet skal ske i overensstemmelse med lokal og national lov givning for elektriske installationer.  
Eisen: Dit product voldoet aan de volgende eisen.  
1
2
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
GEVAAR VOOR BLIKSEMINSLAG GEVAAR: NIET aan toestellen of KABELSWERKEN bij BLIKSEM.  
WAARSCHUWING: HETTOESTELWORDT UITGESCHAKELD DOOR DE STROOMKABELTE ONTKOPPELEN. OM HET  
TOESTEL STROOMLOOSTE MAKEN: de stroomkabel ontkoppelen.  
3
4
Ꮨ
ELEKTRISCHE TOESTELLEN VAN KLASSE 1  
DIT TOESTEL MOET GEAARD WORDEN. De stekker moet aangesloten zijn op een juist geaarde contactdoos. Een onjuist  
geaarde contactdoos kan de metalen onderdelen waarmee de gebruiker eventueel in aanraking komt onder gevaarlijke spanning stellen.  
ƽ
AAN TE SLUITEN APPARATUUR, de contactdoos wordt in de nabijheid van de apparatu ur geïnstalleerd en is gemakkelijk te  
bereiken."  
5
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
OPGELET: De ventilatiegaten mogen niet worden gesperd en moeten de omgevingslucht onge hinderd toelaten voor afkoeling.  
BEDRIJFSTEMPERATUUR: De omgevingstemperatuur voor dit produkt mag niet meer bedra gen dan 40 graden Celsius.  
ALLE LANDEN: het toestel installeren overeenkomstig de lokale en nationale elektrische voorschriften.  
Normes: ce produit est conforme aux normes de suivantes:  
1
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
DANGER DE FOUDRE  
DANGER: NE PAS MANIER le matériel ou les CÂBLES lors d’activité orageuse.  
2
ATTENTION: LE CORDON D’ALIMENTATION SERT DE MISE HORS CIRCUIT. POUR COUPER L’ALIMENTATION DU MATÉRIEL,  
débrancher le cordon.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
4
Ꮨ
ƽ
ÉQUIPEMENT DE CLASSE 1 ÉLECTRIQUE CE MATÉRIEL DOIT ÊTRE MIS A LA TERRE. La prise de courant doit  
être branchée dans une prise femelle correctement mise à la terre car des tensions dangereuses risqueraient d’atteindre les pièces  
métalliques accessibles à l’utilisateur.  
EQUIPEMENT POUR BRANCHEMENT ELECTRIQUE, la prise de sortie doit être placée près de l’équipement et facilement  
accessible".  
5
6
ƽ
ƽ
ATTENTION: Ne pas bloquer les fentes d’aération, ceci empêcherait l’air ambiant de circuler l librement pour le refroidissement.  
TEMPÉRATURE DE FONCTIONNEMENT: Ce matériel est capable de tolérer une température ambiante maximum de ou 40  
degrés Celsius  
7
ƽ
POUR TOUS PAYS: Installer le matériel conformément aux normes électriques nationales et locales.  
Standardit:Tämä tuote on seuraavien standardien mukainen.  
1
Ꮨ
SALAMANISKUVAARA  
HENGENVAARA: ÄLÄ TYÖSKENTELE laitteiden tai KAAPELEIDEN KANSSA SALAMOIN NIN AIKANA.  
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
HUOMAUTUS:VIRTAJOHTOA KÄYTETÄÄNVIRRANKATKAISULAITTEENA. VIRTA KATKAISTAAN irrottamalla virtajohto.  
SÄHKÖ – TYYPPILUOKAN 1 LAITTEET TÄMÄ LAITE TÄYTYY MAADOITTAA. Pistoke täytyy liittää kunnollisesti  
maadoitettuun pistorasiaan. Virheellisesti johdotettu pistorasia voi altistaa met alliosat vaarallisille jännitteille.  
4
5
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
PISTORASIAAN KYTKETTÄVÄ LAITE; pistorasia on asennettava laitteen lähelle ja siihen on oltava esteetön pääsy."  
HUOMAUTUS: Ilmavaihtoreikiä ei pidä tukkia ja niillä täytyy olla vapaa yhteys ympäröivään huoneilmaan, jotta ilmanvaihto tapahtuisi.  
KÄYTTÖLÄMPÖTILA: Tämä tuote on suunniteltu ympäröivän ilman maksimilämpötilalle 40°C.  
KAIKKI MAAT:Asenna tuote paikallisten ja kansallisten sähköturvallisuusmääräysten mukaisesti.  
Standard: Questo prodotto è conforme ai seguenti standard.  
1
Ꮨ
PERICOLO DI FULMINI  
PERICOLO: NON LAVORARE sul dispositivo o sui CAVI durante PRECIPITAZIONITEMPORALESCHE.  
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
ATTENZIONE: IL CAVO DI ALIMENTAZIONE È USATO COME DISPOSITIVO DI DISATTIVAZIONE. PERTOGLIERE LA COR  
RENTE AL DISPOSITIVO staccare il cavo di alimentazione.  
ELETTRICITÀ – DISPOSITIVI DI CLASSE 1  
QUESTO DISPOSITIVO DEVE AVERE LA MESSA A TERRA. La spina deve essere inserita in una presa di corrente specifi  
camente dotata di messa a terra. Una presa non cablata in maniera corretta rischia di scaricare una tensione pericolosa su parti metalliche  
accessibili.  
4
5
6
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
APPARECCHIATURA COLLEGABILE, la presa va installata vicino all’apparecchio per risultare facilmente accessibile.  
ATTENZIONE: le prese d’aria non vanno ostruite e devono consentire il libero ricircolo dell’aria ambiente per il raffreddamento.  
TEMPERATURA DI FUNZIONAMENTO: Questo prodotto è concepito per una temperatura ambientale massima di 40 gradi  
centigradi.  
7
ƽ
TUTTI I PAESI: installare il prodotto in conformità delle vigenti normative elettriche nazionali.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
Sikkerhetsnormer: Dette produktet tilfredsstiller følgende sikkerhetsnormer.  
1
Ꮨ
FARE FOR LYNNEDSLAG  
FARE: ARBEID IKKE på utstyr eller KABLER iTORDENVÆR.  
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
FORSIKTIG: STRØMLEDNINGEN BRUKES TIL Å FRAKOBLE UTSTYRET. FOR Å DEAKTIVISERE UTSTYRET,  
må strømforsyningen kobles fra.  
ELEKTRISK – TYPE 1- KLASSE UTSTYR DETTE UTSTYRET MÅ JORDES. Strømkontakten må være tilkoplet en korrekt  
jordet kontakt. En kontakt som ikke er korrekt jordet kan føre til farlig spenninger i lett t ilgjengelige metalldeler.  
4
5
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
UTSTYR FOR STIKKONTAKT. Stikkontakten skal monteres i nærheten av utstyret og skal være lett tilgjengelig."  
FORSIKTIG: Lufteventilene må ikke blokkeres, og må ha fri tilgang til luft med romtemperatur for avkjøling.  
DRIFTSTEMPERATUR: Dette produktet er konstruert for bruk i maksimum romtemperatur på 40 grader celsius.  
ALLE LAND: Produktet må installeres i samsvar med de lokale og nasjonale elektriske koder.  
Padrões: Este produto atende aos seguintes padrões.  
1
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
PERIGO DE CHOQUE CAUSADO POR RAIO PERIGO: NÃOTRABALHE no equipamento ou nos CABOS durante períodos  
suscetíveis a QUEDAS DE RAIO.  
CUIDADO: O CABO DE ALIMENTAÇÃO É UTILIZADO COMO UM DISPOSITIVO DE DESCONEXÃO. PARA DESELETRIFICAR O  
EQUIPAMENTO, desconecte o cabo de ALIMENTAÇÃO.  
ELÉTRICO – EQUIPAMENTOS DO TIPO CLASSE 1  
DEVE SER FEITA LIGAÇÃO DE FIO TERRA PARA ESTE EQUIPAMENTO. O plugue de alimen tação deve ser conectado  
a uma tomada com adequada ligação de fio terra.Tomadas sem adequa da ligação de fio terra podem transmitir voltagens perigosas a peças  
metálicas expostas.  
4
5
ƽ
ƽ
EQUIPAMENTO DE LIGAÇÃO, a tomada eléctrica deve estar instalada perto do equipamento e ser de fácil acesso."  
CUIDADO:As aberturas de ventilação não devem ser bloqueadas e devem ter acesso livre ao ar ambiente para arrefecimento adequado  
do aparelho.  
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
TEMPERATURA DE FUNCIONAMENTO: Este produto foi projetado para uma temperatura ambiente máxima de 40 graus  
centígrados.  
TODOS OS PAÍSES: Instale o produto de acordo com as normas nacionais e locais para instalações elétricas.  
Estándares: Este producto cumple con los siguientes estándares.  
1
Ꮨ
PELIGRO DE RAYOS  
PELIGRO: NO REALICE NINGUNTIPO DETRABAJO O CONEXION en los equipos o en LOS CABLES duranteTORMENTAS  
ELECTRICAS.  
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
ATENCION: EL CABLE DE ALIMENTACION SE USA COMO UN DISPOSITIVO DE DESCONEXION. PARA DESACTIVAR EL  
EQUIPO, desconecte el cable de alimentación.  
ELECTRICO – EQUIPO DEL TIPO CLASE 1  
ESTE EQUIPO TIENE QUE TENER CONEXION A TIERRA. El cable tiene que conectarse a un enchufe a tierra debidamente  
instalado. Un enchufe que no está correctamente instalado podría ocasionar tensiones peligrosas en las partes metálicas que están  
expuestas.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
4
5
ƽ
ƽ
EQUIPO CONECTABLE, el tomacorriente se debe instalar cerca del equipo, en un lugar con acceso fácil".  
ATENCION: Las aberturas para ventilación no deberán bloquearse y deberán tener acceso libre al aire ambiental de la sala para su  
enfriamiento.  
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
TEMPERATURA REQUERIDA PARA LA OPERACIÓN: Este producto está diseñado para una temperatura ambiental máxima  
de 40 grados C.  
PARA TODOS LOS PAÍSES: Monte el producto de acuerdo con los Códigos Eléctricos locales y nacionales.  
Standarder: Denna produkt uppfyller följande standarder.  
1
Ꮨ
FARA FÖR BLIXTNEDSLAG  
FARA: ARBETA EJ på utrustningen eller kablarna vid ÅSKVÄDER.  
2
3
Ꮨ
Ꮨ
VARNING: NÄTKABELN ANVÄNDS SOM STRÖMBRYTARE FÖR ATT KOPPLA FRÅN STRÖMMEN, dra ur nätkabeln.  
ELEKTRISKT – TYP KLASS 1 UTRUSTNING  
DENNA UTRUSTNING MÅSTE VARA JORDAD. Nätkabeln måste vara ansluten till ett ordentligt jordat uttag. Ett felaktigt uttag  
kan göra att närliggande metalldelar utsätts för högspänning. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, när den ansluts till ett nätverk.  
4
5
6
7
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
ƽ
UTRUSTNING MED PLUGG. Uttaget skall installeras i utrustningens närhet och vara lättåtkomligt".  
VARNING: Luftventilerna får ej blockeras och måste ha fri tillgång till omgivande rumsluft för avsvalning.  
DRIFTSTEMPERATUR: Denna produkt är konstruerad för rumstemperatur ej överstigande 40 grader Celsius.  
ALLA LÄNDER: Installera produkten i enlighet med lokala och statliga bestämmelser för elektrisk utrustning.  
AlliedTelesyn AT-9724TS High-Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  

Agilent Technologies Graphics Tablet DC122 User Manual
Air King Fan 1VN45 User Manual
American Standard Hot Tub 2425LC LHO User Manual
Atlona Car Satellite TV System AT PROHD44M SR User Manual
Axis Communications Camera Lens 18613 User Manual
Axis Communications Security Camera 25734 User Manual
Axor Indoor Furnishings 40352000 User Manual
Bakers Pride Oven Oven D 125 DSP User Manual
BC Speakers Speaker 12PLB76 User Manual
Beko Dishwasher DFS 1511 User Manual